YFP 195: How to Save for Your Child’s Education


How to Save for Your Child’s Education

On this episode sponsored by IBERIABANK/First Horizon, Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich talk through strategies for saving money for your children’s college education. They discuss phases of planning for educational expenses, how to project how much to save, and various options for saving for kids’ college including 529s, Coverdell Education Savings Accounts, UGMA and UTMA Accounts, and Roth IRAs.

Summary

On this episode, Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich talk through strategies for saving money for your children’s college education.

They discuss phases of planning for educational expenses including how to project how much to save. The two main phases of planning for educational expenses, the accumulation phase and the decumulation phase, are explained. In the accumulation phase, even before your children are born but before they begin attending college, parents will need to first assess their overall financial picture and situation, select the savings vehicle that fits the needs of the financial plan, actually fund the account, and check in regularly to make sure that the plan is on track to meet the educational financial goals. In the decumulation phase, parents are actively making financial decisions that directly impact the cost of the child’s education. The decumulation phase also includes actually paying for college. In both phases there are numerous ways to plan and save, each of which should take into consideration the retirement of the parent as well as their wishes for funding for the child(ren)’s education.

Tim and Tim also break down various options for saving for kids’ college including 529s, Coverdell Education Savings Accounts, UGMA and UTMA Accounts, and Roth IRAs, how they work, as well as the pros and cons for each when predicting the future expenses for your child’s education.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, glad to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Good to be back. How’s it going, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: Good. I’m excited about this episode, one that we I know get lots of questions about from the community, from clients. I think it’s an anticipated episode. As I mentioned, a topic around college savings for kids that I believe is top-of-mind for many folks, of those that either have children or those that are thinking about having children down the road and the question is how do you best save for your child’s education? And as pharmacists, we’re all aware — acutely aware — how expensive school can be. 2020 graduate, $175,000 is the median debt load. We all know what that means in terms of our own education and therefore I think it’s probably front of mind as we think about our children’s education as well. Tim Baker, I suspect this is a topic our planning team gets lots of questions about from our clients. Is that accurate?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And it really comes from a place of like, I don’t really know how to approach this. So it’s more of a — I think more so than other things, it’s more of a blank canvas. Some people we kind of direct them if like, hey, if you don’t have a strategy here, we can talk through it. Some people are like, I don’t want my kid to go through what I experienced. I’m going to do whatever I can. And there’s every shade of gray here. So it is definitely something that we talk through with clients who are kind of in the phase of life where they’re just having kids all the way up into where they’re starting to go to college and trying to crack that nut. So it’s definitely something that is top-of-mind for a lot of the families that we work with.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s important before we get into account options and strategies — and we’re going to talk about 529s, probably the most well known option in the group, we’ll talk about coverdell account. We’ll talk about some taxable options, Roth IRAs and so forth. But i think before we get there, it’s important we zoom out for a moment, talk about really two phases of planning for educational expenses, the accumulation and decumulation phase. So Tim, talk us through these two phases, what they are, and thoughts that folks may have as they’re planning for kids’ college in these two phases.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so planning for education is very similar to planning for retirement. You know, we as employees will have a 30-, 40-, 50-year career, whatever that might look like. And typically, the overwhelming majority of that is in the accumulation phase where you are gathering assets and then you go through a decumulation or a withdrawal phase as you go into retirement. The same is true, to a lesser degree in terms of timeline, from an education perspective. So you have an accumulation phase, which is — could be before your kiddo is born all the way up until they’re 18 where they go to college and then you transition to a decumulation phase or a withdrawal phase where you’re actually paying for college. So a lot of families, especially with multiple kids, Tim, you’ll experience this with your boys potentially where you have four different one of these kind of rolling at the same time. So the accumulation phase is when you’re kind of just trying to assess what are your goals with respect to the education planning. So for a lot of people, it’s like, I don’t want my child to experience what I’m experiencing right now. For some people, it’s like, I think they need to have a little bit of it but to a lesser extent. And for some people, it’s like, that’s not part of my AO at all, like I’m not necessarily concerned about that. It’s kind of going through the process of organizing and selecting the appropriate investment vehicles to basically meet the goals that are in front of us, how do we want to fund it, so what is — how are we going to basically put dollars in those appropriate funds? And then just kind of those check in regularly along with the rest of the financial plan to see if we’re on track or off track, just like we would do for retirement and the like. And then really transition to the decumulation phase where it’s more about — and I kind of think about this in terms of the financial plan where you’re not a reactive spectator as I was when I was kind of going through this. I was kind of just I’m going to try to get into the best school that I can and I’ll figure out the price tag and everything later on but more of you’re making empowered, informed decisions about college. I think that’s needed, especially because of where the price of school has gone. So just being more in the driver seat and really work on saving on the cost for college, not just for the cost of college. So one of the big things that we’ll talk a bit about is just college is so ambiguous in terms of what it costs. There’s no price tag for everyone. And potentially help be that objective third party that’s removing the emotion and making an irrational home buying decision and do all this while you are taking care of No. 1, i.e. you and your retirement. It kind of goes back to that idea of put your mask on first before you can put your child’s mask on. The same thing is for education planning. So we don’t want to rob your own financial plan for your child’s college tuition. So those are really kind of the two broad phases that have different nuances as we’re going through them.

Tim Ulbrich: And one of the things you mentioned, Tim, in the accumulation phase is assessing the goal, starting to identify what the need is. And as a parent of a young child myself, multiple children, I struggle with the concept of projecting into the future to estimate educational expenses 5, 10, 15+ years into the future, although I know it’s important to begin to think about that and put some numbers around that as well. So how do you walk through this with clients when it comes to projecting the need?

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s similar to like retirement. You know? Like we don’t really know what the cost of A, B, or C will be. We know that there’s going to be a factor that’s going to be inflation. We know that over the course of the last few decades that the cost of college education has increased threefold over a 17-year period meaning when your child is born, if it costs $40,000 to go to college today, by the time they’re ready to go, multiply that by 3 and that’s basically what a four-year education will cost. So you know, again, this goes back to the whole idea of like investing and time in the market versus time in the market and the time value of money. And for a lot of us, it’s just — it doesn’t necessarily need to be a completely balanced equation. It’s more about am I on track? And am I funding the education funds that are kind of in line with what my goal is? So there are some individuals — and I’ve actually had conversations with individuals where they’re like, we would love to have more kids, but we’re going to stick with the two that we have because if we add another one, we’re not going to be able to have that 100% solution for education. And those are conversations that I want to really dive into a bit more and really see if there is a potential way around it. So you know, just like retirement, we’re going to be tracking if we’re on track or off track. We do the same with education. The problem is that the cost, again, is ambiguous. There’s lots of components to the cost. There’s not like an itemized list that parents can go and say, “OK, this is exactly what it’s going to be. I’m going to know what that’s going to be in 17 years.” We’re just basically using all the tools, the data, we are making this almost just like we would in retirement. And we’re building the plan around that.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s an interesting point, Tim, the ambiguous costs that are involved. There’s the sticker price of an institution, which from my alma mater, they’ve evolved that approach from big sticker price, discounting it with lots of scholarships, so the true cost is not anywhere near the sticker price to others where the sticker price, you’re in in-state tuition without scholarships and other things might exactly be that amount. And you’re looking at that times three or four or however long it takes. So talk to us about types of costs, types of expenses. What are things that folks need to be thinking about here in terms of the factors that would inform what that overall need may be? Or at least to project that need.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, I think the way that a lot of the tools are built, the financial planning tools that this is kind of what we walk through clients on, you know, you have these different sectors of school. So you have maybe like a private nonprofit four-year on campus experience, which may be the most expensive. So like today’s dollars, it’s like $49,000 is the grand. And then we break those up into the different components: tuition and fees, room and board, books and supplies, transportation expenses, and other. So we have that but then we have all the way down to the public two-year kind of in-state commuter student that it’s a fraction of that, $17,000 all in. So we have the ability to, using the data that we have with some type of inflation number, to say OK, if you want your student to go to Ohio State and you’re in-state, it’s going to cost this much. And then we can build a plan around that. If you want your child to go to just the average four-year out-of-state or in-state, it’s going to cost this much. So you can be very, very granular on this. But really, the things to look at is tuition. So they say a rule of thumb is out-of-state tuition is roughly two times more expensive than in-state. Sometimes it’s a credit per hour, sometimes it’s a flat rate. Room and board, I’m going to do the don’t cut across my lawn, shake my cane at you — but like I remember looking at schools in the early 2000s when I was graduating high school and it being very much a bunk bed cinder block, not necessarily a great cafeteria expenses. And then listening to some of my younger cousins and saying like, “They do what?” And it’s kind of like an arms race, so to speak. And I think that’s one of the reasons that — you’re competing for students — but that’s one of the reasons why some of these have gone up. So room and board, does the school require on-campus housing for freshmen, even sophomores? That’s becoming more and more of a thing. A lot of schools have talked about freezing tuition, but room charges kind of remain unchecked. And a lot of these amenities kind of inflate the cost. It could be food where there’s meal plans. Typical meal plans could be $1,000-2,000 per semester. It could also be things like different fees that are for courses or parking or student ID and orientation, library, legal services, student government. It goes on and on. And these are things that can kind of just start really increasing — it could be textbooks. I know there’s a lot of things that are trying to disrupt that in terms of rentals and things like that. And then just transportation or personal expenses. I know you’ve seen back in the day like oh, like do you use student loans to go and travel and do that? And a lot of people are like, you know, let me live. A lot of people are like, I don’t want to do that because I don’t want to have that inflated student loan number at the end. So it’s very much a layered process in terms of what you’re paying. I think to be able to have some guidance and some counsel on this — and there are financial planning practices that specialize in this alone, especially for a lot of people that are working with Gen X individuals. So I think to have a person to help coach you and your teenager, which can be a little bit different. I know if I transport myself back to that, I’m like, I’m doing what I want.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Tim Baker: But I think if we reframe some of the conversations — and we see it when we talk to schools of pharmacy. If we’ll say, “Hey, the average debt load is $175,000,” that’s like funny money, right? But then if you actually equate it to like what does that cost per month in student loans and then you maybe multiply that by 12, which is close to $2,000, a year $24,000 if we go to the standard plan, that’s where you’re like OK, like maybe we need to have a more rational, less emotion, and make sure that, again, if you’re in pharmacy, all of that education equates to a higher income. But that’s not the case for everybody. If you go study something different that you’re not necessarily aligning what you’re paying in tuition with the expected salary.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, one of the things you said, which is something that I’m struggling to think through — Jess and I — with our boys is I’ve heard you talk about taking current costs and projecting out for some factor of growth that we may expect and certainly we’ve all seen the numbers of tuition and fees, important point you made up — fees that are going up that far surpass inflation and historically have gone up at really incredible rates. But it’s important to note there is somewhat of a national conversation going on about the need for more affordable higher education or even perhaps in some cases free education. So this is something that I feel like I’m struggling reconciling is might I be overprojecting the need? And what’s the opportunity cost of that in terms of where else that money could be used and if it’s tied up in this account or that account? We’ll get into that a little bit with individual accounts, but what are your thoughts on that? Not asking you to crystal ball higher education over the next 20 years, but in projecting the need based on going forward and what we’ve seen historically with growth but also some discussions around perhaps this might be more affordable or in some cases free.

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s a great question. And you see a lot of the political discourse around this in terms of like a more progressive political movement to forgive student debt and then offer free options. I’m going to talk out of both sides of my mouth in some degree. So like I think from a planning perspective, it’s tough to — you know, I kind of always default to the status quo. So just assume things are not going to change. But then when I talk about the 529, I’m kind of talking out of the other side of my mouth in that I think that over the last couple years and I think projecting the future, the dollars in those accounts are going to be able to be used for more liberal purposes even than what they’re used for today. So the free college discussion, I do think that there is a very real possibility that by the time, Tim, our kids go to school, that’s going to be an option on the table, an option that I think that a lot of people should seriously consider. I’m kind of putting myself back in that, like would I want to do that myself? And the answer is probably no, I wouldn’t have. But it might make more rational sense to do that, especially if you don’t know what you want to do, which again, most 17- or 18-year-olds don’t really know that. I think that’s going to be the real — the first big domino to fall is going to be kind of that free two-year community college. And I don’t know what stipulations are going to be on that, but I typically from a planning perspective, I plan as if it’s the status quo and hope that potentially there is an improved reality. So like one of the things they just announced with the latest bailout package was that they’re changing some of the rules to the income-driven plans that if you get forgiveness for a non-PSLF strategy between now and 2026, that that’s tax-free. Like you don’t have to pay the tax bomb.

Tim Ulbrich: No tax bomb, yeah.

Tim Baker: But the caveat to that — there’s not very many people because those are 20- to 25-year plans. There’s not many people that are in that boat. So it’s nice, but is that something that they’re going to extend permanently?

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: Maybe, but do you say — you look at that, and you’re like, do you stop saving for the tax bomb? I don’t know if I would feel comfortable telling the client to do that. Now, the nice thing about the tax bomb was typically in a taxable account that you can use that and say OK, no more tax bomb, let me go buy a vacation home. That’s great. If it’s in a 529 account, maybe not so much. So yeah, I think it’s a great question. I think one of the things that a lot of people — and I had these conversations with prospective clients that were like, ‘Yeah, I’m kind of just waiting for this election to see if Biden gets elected what he’s going to do on the student loans to kind of push forward on my strategy.’ And I’m like, in my inside voice I’m thinking like, I wouldn’t hold your breath. And again, like could he forgive student loans? Maybe. But it doesn’t sound like he has an appetite to do it from an executive action. And if it’s — it’s going to be I think for most pharmacists very inconsequential. And again, I don’t know if I would hold up my life, my strategy, to wait for the politicians to come in and save it. So you know, whether that’s $10,000 or $30,000, it’s tough. So I think the big thing to kind of follow, which I think will be — is like that two-year. But then what are the stipulations for that? And then does your student, does your kiddo fit into that? I don’t know if that’s a — if it really, really affects my plan from an education standpoint. So that’s kind of what my take is on that.

Tim Ulbrich: Great discussion. And I think it’s important for folks to consider that on their own as well. And let’s shift now into talking about some of the accounts that are available for kids’ college. We’ll spend a decent amount of time on the 529. We’ll also talk about the Coverdell accounts, the UTMA accounts, taxable accounts, Roth IRAs, so different options here that we might consider. Tim, let’s start with the 529s. Obviously they come up in conversation probably the most often from my experience. What is a 529? What type of contribution limits are out there? How can it be used? And talk to us about these accounts at a high level.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the way that I think about these are these are essentially like retirement accounts for education. But it’s really going to be dependent in terms of — so why do I say retirement accounts? Because most retirement accounts have tax-preferred status. Like if you put dollars in here, you can save taxes. But every state’s going to be different, right? So one of the big things that makes this attractive for a lot of parents is that the parent essentially owns the account. So a lot of these other ones that you mentioned, it’s like, these are Coverdells, UTMAs, UGMAs, these are custodial accounts that really belong to the student. So these are like retirement accounts, but for education that the parent owns. And one of the big things that I think is exciting that really happened over the Trump administration is that they’ve loosened up what these 529s could be used for. So back in the day, you would use these for a long accumulation period. So you would say, “Hey, little Johnny was born in 2000. He’s going to go to school in 2018.” And for those 18 years, you would basically put money in there and then whatever is left over, that’s what he would use for qualified education expenses. Now with some of the changes to the Tax Cut and Jobs Act under the Trump administration, you can now use it both as an accumulation account, so in future like when Johnny goes off to college, but then also today when Johnny starts kindergarten and he’s going to a private school or all the way up through 12th grade. So under the federal law, savers can now throw up to $10,000 to pay for students K-12 tuition. Now every state is going to be different in terms of what they allow. So that’s important to know what your state does allow. The other big thing that the 529 account — so this was under the SECURE Act, basically that it now allows, which is crazy that this is even a thing, but it now allows qualified student loan repayments up to $10,000 per beneficiary from the 529. So before this, if you had $10,000 in a 529 and you had $10,000 in loans, you couldn’t use that money without a penalty, without a 10% penalty to pay that off, which is crazy talk. Like there shouldn’t even be a $10,000 contingent on that. It should be if you have money in there and you have loans, you should be able to pay it off. And then the last thing that the SECURE Act does is it allows you to use the money for like apprenticeship programs. So like we talk about education — I know Tim and I, we talk about this kind of behind closed doors about like what does higher education look like in the future, what’s this going to look like for us versus our kids, and is there going to be a swing back to more of the apprenticeship type programs and that type of thing. And the 529 is opening up that. And you might be surprised by this, but even — like even when I started learning about the 529s, they didn’t allow you to use it for like a laptop or things like software, so it’s been a gradual thing. So I think that the restrictions are going to continue to kind of be loosened up, just because of the need to kind of solve this problem. So the 529, think of it as a retirement-like account that you can put in money and get a deduction on the state level, depending on the state, and basically grow that money tax-free. So if I put in $10,000 over five years and it grows to $20,000, I don’t pay capital gains tax on that as long as it’s used for qualifying education expenses. And I don’t pay any tax on the back end. I do pay a penalty if I use it to buy a car for my kid or something like that. The other big things in terms of flexibility is that let’s say Johnny doesn’t want to go to college. Let’s say he wants to start his own business, which I might be a big proponent of, maybe buy a franchise and learn that. So he can’t use the 529 for that. But maybe Jane, our second child, can. So you can basically use those — and let’s pretend Jane doesn’t want to go. Then maybe their grandkids do. You use it for that. So the money can sit there and grow. A lot of people think like, oh, I’ll never be able to use it. Like you can just keep changing beneficiaries, essentially, and use it for the children or the grandchildren that do need it. So I am a big proponent of it. I know some people, they kind of feel bound by some of the rules because it’s like, what if you don’t use them for qualified education expenses? But I think it’s a viable way to not only get a state tax deduction based on the state that you live in but also to allow those moneys to grow tax-free without paying capital gains that you would see on like a brokerage account or something like that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and the way I think about these, Tim, just to draw another example to how you explained the tax considerations, I think about these as like a Roth IRA for educational savings. So money going in has already been taxed dollars, it’s going to grow tax-free, you can pull it out tax-free for qualified expenses, which you outlined. I do want to just mention because I think it’s worth further explanation, you gave the example that these can now be used for not just higher education but let’s say I have a child who’s in a private education K-12. And some folks might be hearing that saying, “Well, what’s the purpose if I don’t have the long-term investment or gains?” If I have a 5-year-old or a 6-year-old, 7-year-old, they’re in private school and I put money in and then I turn around and take that money and spend it for that education, what’s the point without the gains? And really, the value, Tim — correct me if I’m wrong — would be on the state income tax deduction, right? You’re essentially passing it through, taking advantage of that state income tax deduction. And then of course if there is any time period of growth, you’re going to get some of that growth as well. But is that the main benefit of that type of approach?

Tim Baker: So if you live in the state of Ohio and you know that you’re going to have $10,000 in private school costs, you could put that money in, that $10,000 in, and then at least in the state of Ohio, I think it’s — what is it? $4,200 per kid. So you could at least take that off. So if you make $100,000 that Ohio recognizes income and you basically use it as a pass-through, so it goes right into that account and then you take it out and now the state of Ohio sees that you made $97,400 if I did my math right. Yeah. So $95,400. So the idea is that you use that as a gateway to lower your state income tax. So you’re not really getting any growth at all. It’s just a way to basically contribute, get the deduction, and then use those in more of the near term. It’s the same thing like you could argue with an HSA.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: So the beauty of the HSA is that you can put those dollars in there. So if you put $2,000 into an HSA and then you use it right away, you’re not really getting any growth or tax-free growth on the accumulation of the asset, but you are getting the reduction on your federal and state income in that regard, which can be very beneficial. So and that’s the dynamic that has changed recently under the Trump administration where it wasn’t there before. It’s a great benefit, especially for those individuals that are sending their kids to private school K-12.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m still waiting for them to add the homeschool provisions, by the way.

Tim Baker: Yeah, that keeps getting cut out. And typically at the last minute too.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I’ve got to dust off my lobbying skills. So get down at the statehouse. So some of the disadvantages I think about, you mentioned one of these with the 529. If it’s not used for educational expenses, which it has been broadened out as you alluded to, 10% penalty and tax on the earnings portion of that investment. Other things that come to mind here, Tim, would be as you’ve alluded to, not all 529s are created equal. So they’re based in different states. And this is where you hear folks say, x state’s 529 is the best one. So is it fees? Is it investment choices? Is it flexibility? Like what are the differences that we see in terms of state 529 offerings?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so like unlike some of these other accounts like the Coverdell and the UGMA/UTMA, the 529s are typically administered by the state. So the 529 will say, “Hey, Fidelity or Vanguard or American Funds, we’re hiring you to take care of our state’s 529.” So just like different custodians and institutions, they’re going to charge different fees and have different investments, the same kind of flows through to the 529. And it’s the same with the 401k and the 403b. So some companies will hire companies that are really efficient. So they’ll have good investment selection and cheaper fees. And some where that is not the case at all. Now, sometimes it’s inconsequential because even if the 529 is not great, the state tax deduction is such that it does make sense to pay the lesser fees to get the tax break. But that’s not always the case. And then there’s some states like North Carolina, they don’t care. Like they don’t have any benefit at all. What you essentially want to do is go out and find the state with the best 529 plan, which is often like Nevada’s typically at the top of the list of — the Nevada 529 because theirs is run by Vanguard. It’s typically lower fees and things like that. So a lot of it goes to fees, a lot of it goes to kind of investment selection that is really the driver of like, what constitutes a good 529 plan and what constitutes a not-so-good 529?

Tim Ulbrich: So I don’t want to spend as much time here, but just high level overview of the Coverdell education saving account, the UGMA, UTMA accounts, what are the main differences of those accounts from the 529s?
Tim Baker: Yeah, and to be honest, Tim, like I’ve seen this with clients. I can probably count on my hands how many times I’ve seen these accounts. So these are both custodial accounts, basically like self-directed. So where I was describing with the 529s are kind of administered by the states, you would just go to a financial advisor or even yourself, work with a banker or custodian, and you would say, “Hey, I want to open these up for the benefit of my kiddo.” So if we start with the UGMA/UTMA, these are just really trust accounts that you invest — basically you help invest a child’s money until they can take over it. So it’s owned by the child, but they don’t necessarily have control of it until they’ve reached the age of majority, which for every state it’s going to be different. So that can range anywhere from 18 years old to 25, depending on the state. So these accounts, what you contribute as the parent or the grandparent or whatever, it’s an irrevocable gift that basically means you can’t — there’s no takebacksies. So you give it and then you have no more control of that asset. So in a lot of ways, you’re kind of bound by the gift taxing limits. So these, you typically see these with very wealthy people that are trying to like spend down their estate so they’re not hit with a crazy estate tax. There’s not a whole lot of like tax benefit. So like if you put $10,000 and it grows to $20,000 for that child, they’re paying $10,000 in capital gains. And this could negatively affect the financial aid of the child because the asset is owned by the child. So I don’t really see these much because of the advent of like things like the 529. The other big thing is that I don’t think — then you can use it anything. So if Johnny reaches 18 and he’s like, I don’t want to go off to college and that’s what this money’s for, but I think he can spend it on whatever he wants. So he’s not bound by the education. The Coverdell, these used to be called Education IRAs. The name was changed. These contributions are not tax-deductible, but it does grow tax-free. So they’re very much like Roth IRAs in that the gains are tax-free and they’re self-directed versus state-directed. So you know, they’re — and the withdrawals are tax-free if used for those qualified education expenses, which are also K-12. So this was even before the 529, that was a thing, the Coverdell did have that. But the big downsides for these is that you can really only put $2,000 a year per student. So it’s very low contribution limits. And then you typically phase out like once you reach $220,000 as a married filing jointly or $110,000 as a single taxpayer, you can’t contribute to the Coverdell at all. So for many pharmacists, you know, you’re very quickly kind of out of that, especially if you have dual income. So I don’t really see these anywhere. I mean, I think primarily I see people save for their kids’ education either in a 529, a Roth IRA, a brokerage account, or I’ve even seen some people do it with real estate, which is an interesting concept as well.

Tim Ulbrich: What would be the advantage of a brokerage account? I want to get to the Roth here in a moment, but these ones, we’re obviously talking about some tax advantages that can be associated with them. So what would be the thinking of a brokerage account as a primary vehicle?

Tim Baker: I think for a lot of people, it’s just — it’s that perceived flexibility, which is there. But I think from a Roth, like you can take whatever you contribute to a Roth out any time penalty-free. Tax- and penalty-free. So that’s one thing that a lot of people don’t understand is that if you contribute, you can take that basis out of the Roth IRA. It’s when you start getting into the earnings, that’s when you get into the penalties. So I think for a lot of people, it’s kind of that idea of just flexibility. The problem is that once you start adding up — like if you’re saving for Jane and Johnny’s college over the course of 20 years or so, you could see real capital gains tax there.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: Hopefully they’re long term capital gains so they’re taxed at a preferred maybe 15% versus a 22%, 25%, 30%. But that’s still money that you have to account for when you’re going to use that for education. So again, I like the 529. It’s not investment advice. I think for a lot of people it makes sense because of the flexibility that you can — you know, if one kid doesn’t use it, you can give it to the next one. It’s just my kind of go-to.

Tim Ulbrich: Speaking of flexibility, one of the things that I’ve thought of that I want to get your input on — I suspect our listeners may have as well — is the Roth IRA as an option for thinking of saving for educational expenses with the understanding that qualified educational expenses are an exception to the early withdrawal penalty and as you mentioned, the basis or the amount that you put in a Roth can be pulled tax-free without penalty at any point. So talk us through that strategy. I think of something like a Roth versus a 529, perhaps more investment options, perhaps an option to keep fees down depending on what you have in the 529, the idea that if Johnny and Suzy decide not to go to college and I don’t have anyone else to transfer it, I can continue those savings on for retirement. Downsides of course would be of maybe we’re not using that as the primary or one of the primary vehicles for retirement and savings. So where does that fit in in terms of strategy of folks when you’re thinking about where a Roth may or may not fit relative to the 529 specifically?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, I’d probably default more so to the 529 first, at least get the state tax deduction. But there’s some people that are just like, I want to really use — because that is one of the exceptions in the IRAs that you can for higher education expenses and I think it’s cap, I don’t know if it’s the same for first-time home buyers, if it’s $10,000. I’d have to look that up. But I think it is. I don’t know, I think we talk about accounts like the HSA that has this dual purpose. But sometimes when you have a dual purpose, you have no purpose. It’s almost like when you have two quarterbacks, right? So for like the Roth IRA, like I look at that as a retirement account, not an education account. But it could very much be used as such. I think that yeah, to your point, is there more flexibility in an IRA versus like a 529? Absolutely. Is it even cheaper? Yeah, potentially. But I think that where the 529 is going — and I think you can have both, really. Some people will never reach their state’s benefit in terms of what the state tax deduction would be. But yeah, I think this is more of a conversation for clients that don’t have that benefit, like I said, North Carolina where the Roth is — or even the brokerage account, but I would probably say the Roth first would be the first avenue. So you know, I kind of, again, default rightly or wrongly to the 529. But I think the Roth can be a viable way to at least put some dollars aside for that purpose.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I like the thought on the 529 for the state income tax deduction. Maybe you build it from there, maybe you look at a Roth. The other thing, which I think goes without saying, is that if there is a way to earmark your Roth specifically for long-term retirement savings and still contribute to a 529, we can let that money continue to grow as you say on repeat on this show, it’s time in the market that matters, right? So if we can not have to pull that out for college expenses and let it continue to grow, obviously we’re going to reap the benefits of that compound interest. Last question I have for you, Tim, as we wrap up this discussion on kids’ college and savings: One of the thoughts that I have is coming out, I’ve talked about my story and journey on this show many times before, but I suspect for many other pharmacists that have six figures or more of debt, is there a tendency for folks to overcompensate for kids’ college savings at the expense of other areas of their financial plan, specifically for those that have come out with very high debt loads and because of that experience, might lean in that direction of hey, I don’t want my child to have to go through it, at the expense of their own retirement, at the expense of other financial goals that we might traditionally think come before kids’ college? Is that something you see among clients?

Tim Baker: I think that yes, I do. But I also see like a bit of every kind of approach on the spectrum where it’s like, I don’t ever want my child to ever have to go through this again or go through what I went through. But there’s also like some of it like I went through it, so they have to go through it. And then there’s some reservation of like, just because my loans are so bad, I don’t think I’m going to be in a position to help them.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: Sometimes there is kind of the reaction, you know, equal and opposite reaction type of approach. But it’s all over the place. And I think for the most part, the default has often been I want to help my kids as much as I can, but I also need to make sure that I’m taking care of myself. And I wouldn’t say it’s uncommon, but you know, there have been not as many conversations as you would think where I’m saying like, we have to pull that back. So you know, one of the things that we do as part of the goal setting here is how do we want to go about funding this? And there’s a lot of different approaches where you can plan for 100% or you can plan for something that’s a lot less than that and feel good about that as part of your financial plan. So yeah, it is all over the board. But I think there are sometimes is a push to kind of overcompensate for that or some just like, hey, I had to deal with having to find my way.

Tim Ulbrich: Good luck.

Tim Baker: They do too. Yep. Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, as always, Tim. And to those listening and college savings may be on your mind of one of many financial goals that you’re trying to work through, we’d love to have a conversation with you about the comprehensive planning services that we offer at YFP Planning. Now serving more than 200 households across 40+ states of the country. Our team is well versed in this topic among other parts of the financial plan. And you can go to YFPPlanning.com, book a free discovery call to see if our services are a good fit for you. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please do us a favor and leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show, which helps other folks find out about the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 193: Building vs Buying a Home: What to Consider


Building vs Buying a Home: What to Consider

On this episode, sponsored by Live Oak Bank, Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPh, joins Tim Ulbrich to discuss considerations for building vs. buying a home, the pros and cons of building, lending considerations when building a home, and common pitfalls when choosing to build a home.

About Today’s Guest

Nate Hedrick is a 2013 graduate of Ohio Northern University. By day, he is a clinical pharmacist and program advisor for Medical Mutual. By night and weekend, he works with pharmacists to buy, sell, flip, or rent homes as a licensed real estate agent with Berkshire Hathaway in Cleveland, Ohio. He has helped dozens of pharmacists achieve their goal of owning a house and is the founder of www.RealEstateRPH.com, a real estate blog that covers everything from first-time home buying to real estate investing.

Summary

Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPh, digs into some important considerations to keep in mind when planning to build a home versus buying a home, how the process for building a home differs from purchasing a pre-existing home, the main approaches to building, and important questions to ask your builder or developer when building in a development or on raw land.

Nate shares his personal experience with his clients in the real estate market and the various motivations for building a home instead of buying. Those who choose to build a home over buying a pre-existing home may be motivated by both the nature of the current housing market and a desire for a variety of customizations to the home.

Nate outlines the many pros and cons when building a home. Benefits of building a home include the level of customization on design based on the builder, creating the home that you want but can’t find in the market, and that new home feeling. Cons when building include the time it takes to complete the home, usually around 9 months, as well as the financial process differing for building a home from the process for buying a pre-existing home.

The two main approaches to building a home are examined: working with a builder or developer to purchase and build on a lot or buying a plot of raw land. When working with a builder or a developer, clients can expect to have a concierge type experience, whereas buying raw land may require purchasers to perform more tests and do additional research to ensure that the land will be viable for the build. To avoid major issues, buyers should include their real estate agent and builder in the entire process of buying and building on raw land. Similarly, when working with a builder or developer, buyers should include their real estate agent in the process as your agent acts as an advocate throughout the buying and building process.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Nate, great to have you back on the show. How you been doing?

Nate Hedrick: Tim, great. Always good to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: Excited to have you back. We had you on Episode 197, Ways to Reduce Your Monthly Costs, and we have some exciting news coming up. Details will be forthcoming. But we’re going to be launching a YFP real estate podcast. Our goal is weekly content for real estate investors, either current investors, pharmacists that just want to learn more, that have been thinking about it but haven’t pulled the trigger. We have heard loud and clear from the YFP community that they want more information on real estate as an investing path. We’ve brought more content in 2021, at the end of 2020. We’ve got more coming ahead. And more information certainly will come. Nate Hedrick is going to play a big role in that effort. So Nate, exciting times ahead, right?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah. I’m really excited. It’s going to be a pretty cool podcast, and we’re bringing back another YFP past guest. We’ll keep it a surprise for now. So excited about all that.

Tim Ulbrich: I love it. And I think you and I, we’ve talked about this extensively, but we know that many pharmacists have inquired about real estate investing. And we have seen firsthand the value that can come from showing examples, stories, the good, the bad, the ugly. And for pharmacists that are thinking about this or even have begun this journey that can see other examples all across the country and of course connect with those folks. And so we’re excited to bring this community together of pharmacist real estate investors. Stay tuned. We won’t announce the exact date of launch or any of that at this point, but wanted to put that on folks’ radar that we’re going to have some more great content coming for you related to real estate investing. So Nate, we’ve been talking a lot about home buying on this show. But something we have not talked as much about is building a home. And I’m excited to dig into this topic and talk through some important considerations to keep in mind if you’re planning on going that route and how the process may differ from buying a home. And this information that we’re going to draw for this episode of which we will link to in the show notes comes from a post on your blog, The Real Estate RPh blog, and that post is 20 questions to ask if you’re building a home. So we will link to that. And this episode is really meant for folks that have been interested in this topic, are thinking about building a home, on the fence about building versus buying. And so we’re going to dig into topics surrounding that. So from what you have seen, Nate, with your clients and in the real estate market, you know, how prevalent is this? Are folks often thinking about building a home instead of buying a pre-existing home?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah. It really depends on the market, but I’m seeing more people going this direction simply because the inventory has been so low recently. With the way the market’s been — actually, I just heard about a client recently that looked for a house for about 2.5 months and there was just nothing. Anything that was coming along was going $20,000, $30,000, $40,000 over asking. And it just became untenable. So they said, ‘Look, we’re just going to sit back, we’re going to renew our lease for another year, we’re going to go ahead and build.’ So I think sometimes it’s something that’s being forced upon people, but other times, you just have someone that goes in and says, ‘Look, we know what we want in a house. We can’t find that in our market today. We’re going to go out and build it, right? We’re going to find the specific spot that we want it to be, and we’re going to get the exact house that we want. This is how we’re going to do it.’

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I just had a similar conversation a couple weeks ago with a pharmacist down in the Raleigh, North Carolina, area. Same thing, you know, very hot market let alone just what we’re seeing national trends in that area specifically and prices where homes were going relative to asking said, ‘You know what, we’re just going to build the thing,’ which I’m guessing is easier said than done as we’ll talk about but is certainly a consideration. What other motivations might folks have? I mean, is it typically just demand? Is it I can’t find anything, these custom aspects that I want? Like what are you seeing from folks in terms of motivation to build?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, a lot of times, it just comes down to if you know what you want or if there are specific things that you want in a home and it’s difficult to find in that particular market, then you can go out and build it, right? So if you are — and actually, it’s funny. My wife and I were running into this recently. We’ve been kind of casually looking at other houses, just to see what else it out there, and keep coming back to the fact that like if we were to really move, I don’t know that I’d want to go get this big, gigantic house, right? I’m more interested in the land and putting our kind of style house on it. And there are other people that fall into that same category. So I think there are a lot of different motivations. But if you want that true customizability and that feeling of like the brand new car, right, that’s where that home building usually tends to come in.

Tim Ulbrich: Now Nate, you and I both know — especially you as an agent — that when you say we’re “casually” looking, that’s a done deal, right? I mean —

Nate Hedrick: No, I look at enough real estate to be able to look at it casually I think. Hopefully.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s true. So high level as we start this conversation, and we’ll dig in in more detail about what are some specific considerations when you’re considering building, whether it’s working with an agent or financing, common mistakes that folks make, but high level, pros and cons of building. You know, for folks that are thinking, yeah, maybe it’s us, maybe it’s not us, like what are some things that folks may want to think of when it comes to making this decision.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, the biggest pro is the full customizability. And this can vary based on the actual builder, right? Some builders are going to give you absolute customization from floor plan to design to fixtures. And even if you don’t get that level, right, there are going to be 10 floor plans to choose from. And within that, you can pick your countertops and your cabinets. Again, it gives you that full range of customizations. If you know exactly what you want or are close, 80% of that you know and you can get the rest of the way, that building allows you to get that full customizability. The real con, though, right — or the couple of cons I guess would be timing. So obviously it takes time to build that house, especially if you’re customizing it from the ground up. You’re looking at the very minimum nine months from that date of contract, usually longer, to really get that home built. So waiting game is there. You’ve also got a different type of lending that goes on. And we can talk about this more. But construction loans are very different than your traditional conventional mortgage. And so there’s other stipulations that go with that, some other fees, and it can make it a little bit more tricky, basically.

Tim Ulbrich: And when you talked about customization, Nate, never have gone through this process. You know, I’m sure some folks look at that and they’re like, that’s incredible. I’ll get to choose every detail. I look at that and say, my gosh, I don’t even know what shirt I’m going to wear on any given day let alone what the knobs are going to look like. So is there a wide range of like if you want to keep it simple, builder may say, ‘Here’s Option A, Option B, Option C.’ And then the details are already contained within that? All the way to every little detail is negotiable along the way.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, it depends on the builder. A lot of times what I’ll see — for the most part — is they’ll offer 3-5 options for a given set of whatever, right? So they’ll say, ‘Your countertops are coming from this supplier. And you’ve got from marble to granite, and these are the preferred options.’ And you’ve got an allowance for that is how they often do it. So they’ll say, ‘Cabinetry allowance is $14,000, and we’re getting it from x, y, and z cabinet maker.’ So then you can go to that particular site or they’ll a lot of times have handouts that you can look through, and it narrows down your options, right? That’s the most common setup. The other cool thing I’ll see a lot is where high end, especially high-end purchases and high end builders will offer a designer as part of that process where you can sit down with them for x number of hours as part of that fee or the cost of building that house, you get x number of billable hours with that designer to pick and choose all those things. And a lot times, those designers will bring with them ideas and collections where they’ll say, ‘Well, if you’re going to choose these cabinets, these are the drawer pulls I recommend.’ Again, you can totally get into the weeds, but that can make that analysis paralysis much, much easier to manage.

Tim Ulbrich: And it always stays on budget, right? I mean, it’s always on budget.

Nate Hedrick: You know, it’s funny, again, these allowances, they offer those but you can pretty quickly break them if you want to.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m sure. I’m sure. Well, it just reminds me like, no judgment here, it’s just human behavior. If I were looking at a home and there were some options involved, like you kind of make one decision that I would suspect has a domino effect on other things that you want to do. So since you talked about the lending piece being different, let’s start there. You mentioned construction loans, which are of course a different animal than conventional home financing, which even within that we’ve also got multiple options we’ve talked about on the show before. Most recently, we had Tony Umholtz from IberiaBank, Episode 191. We talked about 10 common mortgage mistakes but in there talked about some of the financing options. So Nate, talk to us here about lending considerations. You know, what exactly are we dealing with when it comes to construction loans? What’s different? How does this change or not change things like pre-approval and down payments and timing? Walk us through that.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, it’s fairly complicated, actually. I’ve been meaning to like put together a post and digest this because there’s not a lot of great resources out there that actually walk through this. But the idea is that you’ve got two phases to think about when you’re thinking about a construction loan. And again, a lender is probably going to beat this up and say, ‘Well that’s not what you call it,’ but this is how I explain it, right? So you’ve got — we should have Tony back with me, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nate Hedrick: But you’ve got this kind of pre-build phase where you’ve got to pay for either the land and the lot, right, the location, and then you’ve got to start paying that contractor, that builder, for some of the materials. So before there’s ever a house there, there’s still costs being incurred. So there’s this construction phase of that loan. And then after, when it’s done, you actually have a mortgage. You have a house that’s paying a 30-year fixed rate mortgage or whatever. And so there’s a number of ways that lenders will break that down. Sometimes they’ll do separate loans. You apply for one, you get the construction loan, you go through that, then you will create basically a mortgage that will pay off that construction loan and then go from there. Sometimes you can do a combined process where the loan will be all in one. They call it a single close often where you’ll close once on that construction loan and it will convert to a 30-year fixed mortgage at the end. It varies by lender, there’s advantages and disadvantages to both. It’s a whole separate podcast episode just to talk about that. But the idea is that you want to make sure you have a conversation. It’s not like going out and getting pre-approved for a $500,000 house. There are considerations in terms of well, is the lot or the land included? Right? Is that included in the finance or do I have to pay for that lot in cash? Again, a number of considerations that come up as you start down that road.

Tim Ulbrich: And so speaking of finding a lot to buy and where folks look and buying land, you know, that to me seems like something that could be both exciting and overwhelming. And I’m used to my typical searches for a home on Redfin and Zillow and things like that. Is it same type of process, you know, in terms of finding a lot to buy, where folks look, what makes a good lot, a bad lot? What are things that folks need to consider here?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, so there’s two main approaches to this. So one is that you’re going to — that is kind of the more traditional option, which is that a builder or developer has purchased several acres and they develop that into a neighborhood, right?

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Nate Hedrick: We see this all the time, right? Coming soon, houses starting in the $300,000s, join Orange Village or whatever it is.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Nate Hedrick: You see these. And a lot of times what happens with that is you’re not going out and finding and hunting down a lot. It’s the full concierge package all put together. You go out to the builder, they say, ‘We have 40 lots that we’re preparing to be built upon. You can pick your spot on the street. Here’s our preferred builder or builders.’ A lot of times they’ll have anywhere from one to three builders that they work with on those development lots. And you basically find your lot that way. The other option is to go out and buy raw land. And you can find these on the MLS, you can find them on Craigslist, you can drive around and see some with a sign in the yard. And you can buy raw land and then go out and find your own builder who will come out and custom build on that particular lot. And so the two approaches are very different. One is a much more kind of put together process, going out and actually going to that developer on that particular build lot whereas the other can be much more flexible and a lot of times, you get your truly customizable builds when you’re talking about going out and buying a plot of land and then bringing in a builder to come do that plot.

Tim Ulbrich: And in the first example, Nate, you’ve given, which I drive by those all the time, right? So you see homes for sale. That seems obviously, you know, concierge is probably a good way to think about things kind of customized and put for you together, it’s packaged together, it’s .25 acres or whatever be the lot size. You know it’s ready for water, sewer, all that stuff taken care of. You have comps of that obviously based on the neighborhood. The other one to me is both intriguing/overwhelming. I was just driving by a property yesterday here in Columbus. It was 131 acres for sale. And I’m like, that’s interesting. I don’t know, it’s by the interstate. I was like, there could be something cool you could do with it. And then I stopped right there, right? Because you start to think about like, what is a comp for 131 acres of land like this? And what about being ready for sewage and water and things like that? So any thoughts for folks that are going more that route of I’m just looking for random land that’s out there and putting a home where it may not be as put together for them, if you will. What are those things? I’ve listed a couple, thinking of comps for land, water, sewer, things like that.

Nate HedricK: Yeah, absolutely. So you have a due diligence period on raw land like that where you can start to assess those things, everything from getting like a geotechnical survey, something as simple as a soils test to determine if the soil is appropriate for bearing the structure that you’re talking about. This is a particular problem in certain areas like I think about my in-laws that live in Pittsburgh. So there’s a lot of hills, there’s a lot of old mine shafts, quite honestly — that sounds ridiculous, but that’s a real problem that you contend with as a developer out in Pittsburgh. And so you have to do these site and soil samples to make sure that you’re going to have supportive structures to be able to handle the house that you want to build there. You mentioned hookups, that’s a huge one, right? So if you are out in the country, you might not have access to city water. You might have to put in a septic system and dig a well and again, that well might need to be 100 feet deep, 200 feet deep. Like who knows? Right? If it’s truly, truly raw land, these are all things that you would need to figure out. And so a lot of times what you’ll do is you’ll find a piece of land that you’re interested in and either the seller of that property has done all that work for you and they can say, ‘Here is the site and soils test. Or here’s the survey that we’ve done. There’s already a well. There’s — whatever, you name it.’ Right? They may have done that up front or you can order that yourself. And there are companies that specialize in this. And a lot of times, your agent will actually help you coordinate with those companies. You can often go to your builder because your builder will have the specs needed to make those decisions. And so I often recommend that if you’re going to be doing this, it’s not a buy land, find a builder later. It’s do it all at once because you want that person involved.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Nate Hedrick: You want the architects involved, you want the surveyors involved, the builders involved, all at the same time to make sure you’re not going to run into a problem.

Tim Ulbrich: Now I suspect the question I’m going to ask here is, ‘it depends,’ but I’m going to ask it anyways. One of the other thoughts I have as I look at raw land periodically just out of interest that folks may be wondering if they’re doing the same build a home is resale value. So especially when you get into perhaps unique pieces of land, unique customized properties, I could see an argument on both sides of that, either hey, it’s a unique piece, it stands out, there’s not a lot of other things like it. Or maybe not as many people are in the market for something like that. So is it a ‘it depends’ situation, just every property, every area where when you get into a customized home, customized piece of land, in terms of resale?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah. I’m stealing from Tim Baker, right? It definitely depends. But there is some speculation to draw in too. There’s actually a number of investors out there that will buy raw land for the sheer purpose of saying, “OK, I know that this market is booming and it’s starting to expand. I think it’s coming this direction in the next 10 years, so I’ll go buy this property that I expect to be worth 10 times this, but I have to wait 8 years to get there.” So it can be very speculative in terms of that value. But the other thing that’s nice is that if you are in like a municipality or a city and there’s land there, you can often compare that land value on a cost per acre to other land in the area. So if you — especially like something where we live in Ohio, everything’s flat and easy to kind of figure out. If you’ve got a 1-acre parcel in x city, it’s potentially pretty similar to another 1-acre parcel in that same city. And here’s why. And so you can compare those somewhat easily in certain areas. But in others, it’s almost impossible.

Tim Ulbrich: That makes sense. And you know, you had talked about some key people of the team. And I think you do a great job when you’re talking about home buying or home building in this case and considerations, how important the team is. So we talked about the lending piece and we’ve mentioned the agent piece and the builder piece. But we haven’t talked about that in detail. So let’s start with the agent piece. How does a real estate agent support someone building a home? And how does this differ from those that might be looking to buy a pre-existing home in terms of who they might be looking for?

Nate Hedrick: This, again, kind of depends on if we’re talking about building in that development or building in the middle of nowhere or on raw land. But in both cases, you absolutely want to have an agent on your team. I think it’s obvious a lot of times if I’m going out and buying raw land and getting a builder that it might be helpful to have an agent in that case. But it doesn’t seem as obvious when you’re talking about, again, that concierge model we talked about where you’re going to a site plan, they’ve got a model home, their office is open, they’ve got all these friendly real estate agents there. It often feels like I shouldn’t even need anybody to help represent me. But the reality is you absolutely should. And it costs you almost nothing to do that. The agent being involved is your representative, right? The person that’s selling that property, they are trying to sell that property for as much as they possibly can. So even if you’re going to a development, 50 homes available, everything’s done for you, you absolutely want to have that agent as the core member of your team to help with things like negotiating the contract. I’ll give you a great example. I have a client that I’m working with right now. And our early conversations with the builder, they cited this great, gorgeous rooftop deck, OK? And they said, the rooftop deck, you can add it on for I think it was — I don’t know — maybe $15,000. Let’s just say it was that. And it was this awesome like you could see downtown and you can see the lake from downtown. This place is gorgeous. And they quoted it at $15,000 early on. Well that property started blowing up in popularity. And it got really hot really fast. And so we were in but kind of negotiating the contract still. And so we get to kind of the closing bit of figuring out this contract, and they said, “Oh yeah, and that rooftop deck. It will be $22,000.” We said, “Hold on.” And you know, at the time, the buyers were like, “Well, that’s just what we have to do.” I said, “No, I’ve got some notes here.” So I went back and we looked at it, and we had clear indications from the buyer — or from the builder that it was a $15,000 add-on.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Nate Hedrick: And so I was able to help negotiate that back down and save them that $7,000. So having an advocate on your team, somebody that knows this stuff inside and out is absolutely essential.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And not only an advocate, but an advocate that takes good notes and is ready to act on your behalf as well.

Nate Hedrick: Helps to have a detail-oriented pharmacist as your agent I suppose. But really, again, that agent is going to also grow the rest of your team from there, right? So if you need inspectors, if you need a lender, if you need a title company, again, most of the time the seller’s going to have the preferred title company that they’re working with or the preferred lender that they’re working with. But you still want someone on your team that can grow that, the rest of that process if you need it.

Tim Ulbrich: And for those listening to this episode, if you’re looking to buy or build a home in 2021, as you likely have heard us talk about on this show before, we’re excited about our partnership with Nate, The Real Estate RPh, for the Real Estate Concierge service that he can help get you connected with an agent that is local to your area but also be alongside for the process, talk to you at the beginning, walk you through along the way, be a second set of eyes, help you think about the beginning to the end, and work with that agent locally as well. So you can learn more at YourFinancialPharmacist.com. You can click on “Buy or Refi a Home,” and then “Find an Agent,” and that will get you Nate. And you guys can schedule a quick discovery call to see if that’s a good fit for what you are looking for. So we talked about the agent, Nate. The builder is one that comes to mind as well. You know, we’ve all heard horror stories of I was working with this builder, they went bankrupt, something happened. I feel like any neighborhood I’ve been in, there’s always been a story of like, oh this stopped here in the neighborhood because this happened. So talk to us about — of course it depends on some level, but considerations when working with and finding a builder.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, this is exactly why I put together that blog post that you mentioned about the 20 questions to ask if you’re building a home because there are a number of things that I see my clients not even realize they should be asking up front. It starts very, very simply, right? You want to kind of get an idea of how long they’ve been in business, look at the number of homes they’ve built, look at the number of homes they’ve built in your area as well. So you know, if they’re brand new to Cleveland, Ohio, they’ve never built here before and they’re used to working in a different state, they may not be ready for some of the things that come up with building in this particular location. So getting questions about have you built in this municipality before? Have you dealt with the city, the planning committee, the zoning committee, this architect, you name it? All that stuff, you want to make sure there’s some sort of background going into that. So a lot of the questions that I often mention to my clients revolve around proving that that person is experienced enough to handle what we’re dealing with and then also licensed and insured in all those things as well so that if something does go wrong, you’ve got kind of this backup to make sure that you’re not going to lose your money or anything like that. And from there, it really grows to questions about the specifics in terms of are you looking for more energy saving features? Are you looking for more customization? Right? Because certain builders are going to be more customizable than others. Or perhaps maybe they only do certain types of appliances, and you really want the top-of-the-line. So those are all questions that you want to ask as you get into the weeds. But always start with those broader questions about experience and making sure that they’re appropriate for the job.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Nate. And again, to the community, the conversation we’re having today comes from an article that Nate wrote on the Real Estate RPh blog, “20 Questions to Ask if You’re Building a Home.” We’ll link to that in the show notes. And again, if you’re in the market for buying or building a home in 2021, make sure to head on over to YourFinancialPharmacist.com, click on “Buy or Refi a Home,” and we’ve got additional resources available to you right on that site in addition to an option to find an agent, which Nate can help you throughout that process. So Nate, as always, appreciate your time and your willingness to share your expertise with the YFP community.

Nate Hedrick: Absolutely. Thanks for having me, Tim.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 189: Options for Investing When You’re Maxing Out Your Retirement Accounts


Options for Investing When You’re Maxing Out Your Retirement Accounts

On this episode sponsored by LendKey, Tim Baker, Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist, joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about strategies for investing when you have maxed out your traditional retirement accounts.

Summary

Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich dive into what traditional retirement accounts are, how contributions have or have not changed, the priority of investing, and strategies for investing when you’ve maxed out your traditional retirement accounts.

Tim Baker explains that traditional retirement accounts are generally any employer sponsored accounts, like 401(k), 403(b), 401(a), or TSP accounts. Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP Ira, and Simple IRA accounts are also considered traditional retirement accounts. Many of these accounts have stayed stagnant in regards to contribution limits from 2020 to 2021, like 401(k) and 403(b) accounts which remain at $19,500. However, IRA accounts have increased to $6,000 (aggregate total for traditional and Roth accounts) and HSA contributions have increased to $3,600 (single) and $7,200 (family) with a catch up of $1,000 for those over 55.

Tim suggests a few areas of investing to consider after maxing out traditional retirement accounts. Real estate investing is a viable way to build wealth as it often provides flexibility and cash flow, can generate both short and long term gains, and comes with a lot of tax benefits. Of course there are risks involved with real estate investing and it isn’t as passive as a traditional retirement account, but can be a way to help grow your income and net worth. Starting or investing in a business is another avenue to take after maxing out your retirement accounts. This could be in the form of starting a side hustle or business, inheriting or becoming part of a family business, or investing in a partnership. Lastly, taxable brokerage accounts like Robinhood or Acorns are a good stepping stone to get into a different type of investing, however Tim suggests being intentional with what your setting brokerage accounts up for. He also shares that the more boring you can be with investments, like investing in the S&P 500 or total market index funds, the better it is.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, good to have you back on the mic. What’s new?

Tim Baker: Not much. Just settling into our new office, YFP headquarters in downtown Columbus. So that’s coming together slowly with just furniture and everything else. But yeah, just getting comfortable. How about you?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, exciting times, I think, for YFP. Excited about having you in Columbus. And we’ve got some exciting things planned for the year, and so here today we’re talking about all options for investing after you’ve maxed out traditional retirement accounts. So first of all, if you are somebody listening that hasn’t maxed out your traditional retirement accounts, kudos to you. That’s not an easy thing to do by any means. And remember, as we say many times on the show, investing is only one part of the financial plan. It can’t be looked at in a silo. And for those that are listening that are at the beginning of the investing journey or looking for a refresher, make sure to check out episodes 072-076, our Investing 101 series, as well as Episode 163, Investing Beyond the 401k, 403b, where we discussed IRAs and HSAs in details. And so we’re going to build upon that information here today. So Tim Baker, let’s back up a bit. What are we talking about when we say traditional retirement accounts?

Tim Baker: I guess the thing that pops into my head first and foremost are going to be what’s provided through the employer. That’s typically things like the 401k, the 403b. A lot of us have supplemental retirement plans, things like the 457, some people have 4018s, which are kind of like 401k’s. And then those that we kind of manage ourselves or through the help of a financial planner, so these are things like traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs. Sometimes we’ll see SEP IRAs for those that are self-employed or work for a small business. And simple IRAs also fall under that. So traditionally, those are the ones that we lean on first when we’re kind of looking at ways to defer income for the purposes of saving for retirement.

Tim Ulbrich: So talking about 2021 numbers here, have contribution limits changed from 2020 as folks are considering, alright, new year, what could I be doing to take advantage of these accounts?

Tim Baker: Some of them have changed, but a lot of them actually stayed stagnant. So the most common, the 401k/403b, is the same. So in 2020, you could put $19,500 per year. And that’s of your own money, so doesn’t matter what the match is that your employer gives you. That’s of your own money. And that’s the same for 2021. So you know, if you take your income, you take $19,500 and divide it by your income, that’s the max percentage that you could put in throughout the course of that year. So what I always say to clients that — particularly those that are starting out and maybe they have a little 401k inertia, which is hey, I put 3% and my employer matched 3%, and then they get stuck there. Years later, they’re 5-10 years into their career and they’re still there, that’s typically not going to be enough. So I kind of like the idea of planting the seed of a race to 10% or a race to double digits. And again, that’s kind of just a rule of thumb. Now, in the IRA world, the contribution limits are also the same. So you can put up to $6,000 per year, if you’re thinking about this monthly, $500 a month, into a traditional and/or Roth IRA. So that’s an aggregate number. So if I put $1,000 into my traditional, I can put $5,000 into my Roth IRA. And then probably the other one that I would call out that actually did creep up a bit is the HSA, the Health Savings Account, which is the one that we always talk about that has the triple tax benefit. So if you’re in a high deductible health plan, you basically qualify for that. If you’re an individual, you can put up to $3,600 per year. If you’re a family, $7,200. And then if you’re over 55, there’s a catchup of $1,000 per year as well. So those would probably be the ones that I would call out. So again, if you are in that population of people — which I wouldn’t say it’s always a lot of the clients that we’re working with — but if you are in that population of people that are maxing out the 401k, the IRA, the HSA, then this episode, you know, might be for you where you’re like, OK, well where do I go next?

Tim Ulbrich: And as a reminder, we have a new quick reference guide too. You can quickly take a look at 2021 key retirement numbers, including 401k, 403b, traditional IRA, Roth contribution limits, HSA, education tax credit incentives, required minimum distribution, tax rates. So for those number nerds out there, this is for you. YourFinancialPharmacist.com/2021, you can download that sheet. So Tim, that was one of my questions. I talked with a prospective client this morning who was really in this camp of, you know what, I need to full throttle my investing plan. So I’m at a point of or near at a point of maxing out my 401k, yes, I see another $6,000 I can put in an IRA, doesn’t necessarily have access to an HSA, so is at this point of alright, I’m ready to go with the next steps. So how often do you see this among pharmacists and clients of ours? How hard is it for pharmacists to max them out? And for those that aren’t maxing them out, what’s typically holding them back?

Tim Baker: It’s hard. I think, again, it depends on where you are in kind of your career and where you’re at. If you are a more of a new practitioner and you’re saddled with six figures of debt, to put money into a 401k can be a little bit of a tough go, especially if you’re looking at a $2,000 monthly loan payment. Sometimes, that is very much baked into the strategy that we are employing that the money that goes into these pre-tax accounts lowers AGI and potentially maximizes a forgiveness play, or if you’re looking at a I’ve refinanced, I’m trying to get through them quickly, I am paying $2,000, $3,000, $4,000, sometimes just not a lot of money left over to go into these retirement accounts. Now, there are 10% of pharmacists out there — those are the numbers — that don’t have loans, that kind of the world is their oyster. But that doesn’t always necessarily mean that their money is going into retirement accounts. A lot of pharmacists after going through years and years of training, it’s kind of like, alright, I need to treat myself a little bit. And then that can sometimes be hard to get out of as well. So I think the flip side of that is if you are further along in your career — so the answer, you know, one of the questions is like, is it a big deal that I’m not maxing these out? And I’m like, it depends. If you’re 35 and you’re trying to retire by 50, maybe it is a big deal. If you’re 45 or 50 and you’re trying to retire by 60, maybe it is a big deal. So I think it’s a little bit of, again, looking at the math and how you feel about what your retirement prospects look like and then marrying those two up. But I think if you are in early in your career and you’re maxing these out, it’s just such an easier lift because in the investments, it’s not about timing the market, it’s about time in the market. And if you can get your money working and have that work for 3-4 decades, that money, you know, is just going to go that much further rather if you wait a decade or two out before retirement. So typically, the earlier that you do it, just the easier that number is that you need to be setting aside per month versus waiting. And that’s really what we’re talking about here.

Tim Ulbrich: And I’m going to give a disclaimer here, Tim, before I ask my next question that none of what we’re talking about here is obviously individual investment advice. And for the reason you just mentioned there, it does very much depend on one’s personal situation. And it’s becoming the running joke of, “it depends,” on this podcast. But it’s so true and speaks to the value of one-on-one, customized planning. So my question is, you know, let’s say someone is investing in their 401k/403b or employer-sponsored plan, should they focus on maxing that out first? And really, what I’m getting here is what’s the order of priority when it comes to investing and how do we think through determining this order?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so if we kind of can figure out like how to navigate the multiple competing priorities — and obviously, we talked about like student debt, you know, we didn’t really focus on consumer debt, which we have a lot of pharmacists that come to us that are — we recently started working with a pharmacist, and their biggest pain point was about $50,000 in consumer and personal debt. So — and rightfully so. That’s the one that’s probably the most debilitating. If we can work through the other competing priorities like other pieces of debt and the life events that are — whether it’s marriage, buying a house, having kids, going on vacation, caring for elder parents, you know, saving for kids’ educations, and all that stuff, then really, the baseline I think priority that we typically look at — and I would probably say for Step 1, everything else aside, unless you have really terrible credit card debt, at a minimum I think everyone that has a match available to them from their employer, they should capitalize on that. So you know, the old adage is like, take advantage of the free money. So one of the things I’ll humble brag is like YFP, we have a Safe Harbor 401k that if our employees put in 5%, we match 4%. And I want to make sure that everyone’s taking advantage of that because it is free money. So to me, for the most part, everyone should do that. From there, you know, if there is an HSA on the table due to a high-deductible plan, I’d probably say that would probably be the second bucket to look at because it has a lot of versatility in terms of what you can use it for. You can use it for today’s health expenses, tomorrow’s health expenses, and then tomorrow’s like retirement. And with the triple tax benefit, if you can shelter $3,600-$7,200 per year for the next x amount of years, that’s a great benefit. And then from there, what we typically say is look outside of the 401k and look at things like IRAs, whether that’s a Roth IRA or a traditional IRA. The reason for that is typically, a lot of 401k’s are strapped with administrative fees and/or there’s not a lot of investment options. But it’s more tied to the fees. So if you can establish an IRA and keep costs low, I think that’s a big win. We believe that the expense related to investments is going to be one of the bigger drivers in making sure that you have an efficient portfolio. So if we can do that in an IRA — and to go back to that, a lot of 401k’s are not created equal. So you have some great 401k’s and 403b’s that are absolutely efficient and fantastic, and then you have those that are not. And it can be a very, very wide range. We’re talking about, you know, very wide differences between great and not-so-great. Typically, though, once you max out the IRA, what you want to do is go back to the 401k and max that out. So that’s that $19,500. So again, you calculate that by $19,500 divided by your — or your income divided by the $19,500 — and that’s the percentage that you use. And then finally — and this can probably work concurrently in some ways — you know, if you do have access to other retirement plans or SEP IRAs if you have a side business or things like that, that might be another good way to go. And then from there, from a traditional sense, you know, a lot of financial planners will just point you to a brokerage account. So those individuals that have like a Robinhood account or an Acorns account, where they typically do that Step 1 or Step 2, you know, in most instances, it’s better to kind of make sure that you’re doing all these other things first. But it could be a brokerage account, it could be where you get into real estate investing. It could be where you are buying into a business or starting a business, things like that. But that’s kind of a general rule of thumb for most investors on how to tackle the priority.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Tim. And we will link in the show notes, we have an investing priority document. We’ve talked about it previously on the podcast as well. I can’t help but mention, you brought Robinhood’s name up before — what a week for Robinhood with the whole Gamestop thing going on this week.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I know, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Pretty crazy times. But I think brokerage accounts are getting a lot of attention this week. So we’ve established some of these more traditional accounts, 401k’s or 403b’s, or for those that are working in the federal government, of course the TSP, you mentioned the HSA, the IRAs, going back to the 401k or 403b or equivalent, perhaps a SEP IRA. And then we got to this, you know, what’s next, right? And so of course, often the advice is a brokerage account. But you mentioned several other things that might be in the mix, so perhaps real estate investing, of course, the brokerage account, investing in a business — I know I often hear something like insurance type of investments may come up. So let’s break these down a little bit further. First off, real estate investing. This is something we talked about a lot in 2020 and are excited to dig into this topic even more in 2021 as we’ve heard from many of you that are interested in learning more about real estate investing, whether that’s hearing some of this for the first time, whether that’s investing in building the portfolio that you already have, or perhaps for some of you, hearing and saying, you know what, it’s not a good fit for me. And obviously, we try to bring both sides of this, of sharing stories of folks that have been successful but also appropriately bringing in the risks that can come here as well. So Tim Baker, from your perspective, I know you personally have an investment property, I know this is something that has come up with clients, something we’re talking more and more about with clients, tell us at a high level why real estate investing, from your perspective, can be something at least worth evaluating for folks out that are maxing out these accounts?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think, you know, if we step back and we kind of think about like traditional financial planners, I think, you know, what I typically hear is from a financial planner, like ah, like do you really want to do that? Because do you want to unclog toilets at 2 in the morning? And the answer is no, nobody wants to do that. But I think the sentiment is really rooted in how the advisor gets paid in a lot of ways. So traditional financial planners are really going to get compensated by you, the client, having as much money in your traditional investments, whether that’s an IRA or a brokerage account or a 401k for you to eventually roll over to them for them to manage. I guess the way that we view this is we view real estate as a viable way to build wealth outside of traditional investments that have both kind of near-term benefits of flexibility and cash flow, you know — for example, when you put your money into a 401k, like wave goodbye to that until you’re at least 59.5, for the most part. So you never really can get access to that where if I buy a property, like I could start cash flowing that and make $100, $200, $300 off of that property the next month. There’s that near term, but then you’re also building, and the asset is appreciating as the note that you’re paying down is depreciated. And then there’s a lot of tax benefits from that in terms of being able to make income but then offset that by the deductions. And there’s a lot of things that’s built into the IRS tax code that reward real estate investors. And I think the other thing that’s flexible is that you could keep that, you know, if you talk about a buy-and-hold strategy, you could keep that for the next 30 years just like you keep a 401k. Or you could say 10 years into it, I want to liquidate this and do something else and basically cash out the equity that you have in the property and go do something completely else, which means you could retire on that. So that is maybe another viable strategy. So because of the flexibility, I think because of the tax benefits that you receive, I think it’s a viable way to build wealth. Now, is it as passive as traditional investment? No. And the more passive it is, the less benefit and flexibility that you’ll get. The more actively managed it is, typically the more flexibility and benefit that you get. But then the tradeoff is that you’re actively managing and it takes time and there’s risk. Well, there’s risk in anything. But I think, Tim, really for those reasons, that’s why we like it. And we think it’s a vi — again, a viable way to build wealth. And at the end of the day, the way that we work with clients is what we’re trying to do is help grow and protect income so you could make an argument that we’re growing income in a real estate portfolio by, you know, we’re cash flowing and we’re protecting it because maybe we’re diversifying that away from a typical pharmacist’s salary. We’re growing and protecting the net worth, which means what we have a collateralized asset with a note that’s appreciating over time, while keeping your goals in mind. So again, if that means early retirement, if that means more of a nontraditional path in terms of the career, I think the real estate aspect creates a lot of opportunity to really fulfill financial independence in the eyes of the pharmacist.

Tim Ulbrich: And I’m so glad, Tim, you mentioned the story and example that’s often used as the objection early on of like, who wants to be a plumber in the middle of the night? And I remember — for those that have read “Rich Dad Poor Dad,” they will be able to resonate with this — but I remember reading that book for the first time, and it was like unlocking like a piece of information that I hadn’t really been exposed to or learned before. And that obviously is a little bit more philosophical in nature, and then you start talking to people who are doing it and learning more about it, and that’s one of the great things about where we are in 2021, I mean, the resources available out there to learn more and to connect with others that are doing it is really, really incredible. But I think being open to learning, you know, perhaps being willing to see what might be the answer to some of those objections is really important. And we’re excited to bring more pharmacist’s stories to this community in 2021 on real estate investing and also connect other pharmacist investors with one another. And I would point folks back to Episode 167, we brought on David Bright to talk about must-know real estate terminology. I think that’s a great place to start. You mentioned, Tim, many of the upsides and benefits, perhaps appreciation, cash flow, tenants paying down a loan, some tax benefits, obviously we’re just scratching the surface here. And obviously, you also presented some of the challenge. You know, it may not necessarily be passive, the quality of tenants may or may not be what you have in mind. I think too there’s a little bit of, you know, I call it HGTV syndrome, Tim, in terms of like, you know, you watch the flipping show and you’re like, yeah, I got it, right? And so I think we’ve all got to take a step back and really make sure we’re not overconfident. But I think for pharmacists, I’m not sure overconfidence is often the risk here. I think it’s probably being too passive and feeling like it’s out-of-reach and not necessarily being willing to take what they may feel is a very significant risk to get started. So we’ve talked about several of these strategies on the episode thus far, you know, obviously there’s the buy-and-hold strategy. In Episode 129, we brought on Aaron Howell, and he discussed how he built a 29-unit portfolio. We brought Ryan Chaw on Episode 140 about how he built his portfolio of college town investing. Episode 173, we brought him back on to talk about his systems, which was a really neat episode to hear how he actually operationalizes this. Obviously that’s one strategy, buy and hold. We’ve talked about flips before, Nate Hedrick, 178, five lessons learned from his flip. And we’re going to continue the conversation. There’s other areas, of course, in wholesaling and forming partnerships, and we’re excited about what’s ahead here. So real estate investing, Tim, is one aspect. Another that pops to mind that is near and dear to our hearts, obviously, with what we’ve been building at YFP is building a business, investing in a business, and this, of course, is a big topic. But at a high level, you know, what types of things do you see from our clients in terms of whether it’s side hustles that they’re starting, businesses that they’re starting or even perhaps looking at investing in other businesses and how they begin to evaluate whether that’s a path forward for them?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think what I see most frequently is an interest in a closely-held family business, so like a private company that was inherited from maybe a grandfather or things like that and, you know, the question is like, should I keep this? Like what’s the benefit? And you know, they’re getting K1 every year with maybe a little bit of income that they have to basically declare for the IRS. So it could be like more like that. But then I think that there’s also — I mean, we’ve had clients that have taken their side business, their side hustle, and made it a fully fledged, like a regular business. So it could be just plowing money back into the business itself rather than going into the traditional, but I also have had clients interested in investing in like a partnership, whether it’s like a gym or things like that that, you know, that’s a little bit more of a — there’s a lot of risk there. There’s a lot of, again, what’s your role? What do you bring to the business? Is it money? Is it expertise? Is it planning? Is it clients? And kind of really understanding that. Sometimes, it’s just money. So it’s like, hey, I’m going put money in and let you do your thing, and you’re kind of more of a silent investor. So this can come — just like real estate, this can come in a lot of different flavors. So can investing in a business. Again, one of my favorite shows on TV is “Shark Tank.” So I love watching that and how investors speak with business owners and I’m always interested in business just because I just like to talk small business, in particular, and what makes it work and not work. I think we have a lot of clients that are there. I would say for the most part, the predominant thing that I see is a share of an inherited family business or really, taking this hobby or this side hustle and really forming a fully fledged business and how to really handle that. And a lot of the conversation is, you know, do I take money out of the business? Or do I basically reinvest into the business so I make sure it survives and grows?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we will continue — one of the areas that I’m very passionate about in the profession of pharmacy is I feel like we are missing some creativity around helping students as well as helping pharmacists just imagine what could be different possibilities or ideas. And I think we do that by sharing stories. Not that they necessarily hear a story of a business or side hustle and say, “I’m going to do exactly that,” but to help them think about another area as an example of something that they’re passionate about in terms of solving a problem, creating a solution to that problem. And so we’ll be bringing more in that area. And you know, I agree. We have to know — you know, everyone knows the stats that most small businesses don’t work. Debbie Downer reality. But I think for those that really do their due diligence, understand what their business is all about, is there a market for it, you know, there certainly is some upsides financially in terms of tax, building equity. One of the things that gets me so excited about business is that there may not be a ceiling. Obviously there can also be a floor.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: Or falling through a floor that you have to be aware of and also access to some of the retirement options that we’ve already talked about. So we mentioned, again, in the context of investing beyond maxing out traditional accounts, we’ve talked about real estate, we’ve talked about investing in business. What about probably the most common area here, which is taxable and brokerage accounts? What are some things as you’re working with clients that you’re advising them, getting them to think about, whether it’s choosing where they’re going to be investing that money, how they might keep fees low, how they determine where those investments go? Talk to us about the approach in putting money into a taxable or brokerage account.

Tim Baker: The most common that you see are kind of like the Robinhood, Acorns just because they’re UI and they’re use is so clean and easy. And I think for a lot of people that are curious about investing, it’s a first way — you know, kind of the first way to kind of wade in and see, OK, I want to buy this stock, etc. Typically, we talk about the priority of investing, you know, we just started working with a client that had, again, $20,000 in credit card debt but then they have a $10,000 like Robinhood account. And I’m like, those probably don’t make sense. So I think like with brokerage accounts, what I am a big fan of seeing with savings is like what is this account actually for? So a lot of the uses that we see for brokerage accounts are a tax bomb. So those that are taking non-PSLF forgiveness, you know, they need to cover that tax bill. So they’re putting money into a brokerage account because they’re going to need to access it before 59.5 years old, so they can’t put it into their retirement account, and they need to be able to pay off that tax bill when the loan is forgiven. The other one is, again, when we max everything out, that’s a good use for it. So what I typically urge clients to do, though — and it really directs how we’re going to allocate that particular account — is what is it for? So if you’re trying to retire at 50, all of these traditional accounts that we’ve talked about, for the most part — and there’s some exceptions of what you can do, but you can’t really access them without a penalty until you’re 59.5 years old. So that means you have 10 years, 9.5 years where you have to figure something out. And usually, that figure something out is having a robust brokerage account or maybe liquidating part of a real estate portfolio to be able to cover those first 10 years of retirement. I think the big thing here is if you have an IRA, I probably would just have your brokerage account there. And I’m not down on any of these other apps or things like that, but I think for ease of use — and again, not every custodian is equal; there’s going to be different fees and things like that. So you want to be mindful of that. But I know the sexy and the exciting thing to do is to pick individual stocks, whether it’s Tesla or Gamestop or Ford or whatever it is. But I think, you know — and again, not investment advice — but I think the more boring that you are with your investments, typically the better it is because the sexier and the, you know, the investment strategy is, typically the more speculative and the more expensive it is to the investor. So it could be as easy as putting it into an S&P 500 index or a total market index or things like that and call it a day. So there are some advisors that are colleagues of mine, they hear me talk about real estate investing and all of these other things, and I’ll say like, “Hey, this is the reason I believe that a lot of traditional advisors don’t say it is because it’s a function of income.” And sometimes, it’s — and I get a little pushback on that because I’m kind of criticizing my brethren, but it also could just be it’s a ‘Keep It Simple, Stupid’ approach, which I think for finances, it can go a long way. So you know, there is absolutely nothing wrong — I know we’re talking about small businesses and real estate — there is absolutely nothing wrong with having a 401k, an IRA, and a brokerage account and doing a damn good job of building wealth and living an intentional, wealthy life with those tools.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think to that point, Tim, like I would encourage our community, like lean into what you’re comfortable on. You know, I think sometimes there’s some FOMO of like, you know, oh, so-and-so is doing real estate investing or so-and-so owns their own business, and it’s cool and flashy, which you usually don’t see the other side of it all the time. But maybe that is a fit, maybe it’s not. But you know, learn about them, understand them, understand your risk tolerance — and maybe for many folks, it’s really leaning into maxing out traditional accounts, maybe opening some brokerage accounts. But perhaps those other things aren’t a good fit. And I agree with you, I’m seeing more and more pharmacists that seem to be interested in financial independence, early retirement, some combination of those, whether they love their job or maybe not. And I think this is where these tools, the brokerage account specifically, come into play. And last week, we interviewed Scott Rieckens, author of “Playing with FIRE,” Episode 188 for those that are interested in learning more about Financial Independence Retire Early. Tim Baker, great stuff. I think this really highlights for me, again, we’re only talking about here investing, one part of the financial plan. But within the investing bucket, we’ve talked about several different things that of course are traditional accounts and all of the nuances there and then beyond that, lots of decisions to be made, priorities to be balanced, and evaluations to be done. And I think this is a great opportunity to promote and shoutout our financial planning team and our lead planners that work directly with clients one-on-one to have these types of conversations, to look at what are the opportunities, what’s the goal, what’s the purpose, what’s the priority, and then ultimately, how do we put a plan in place to make sure that we achieve it over time? So for those that are interested in learning more about the comprehensive financial planning services we offer at YFP Planning, head on over to YFPPlanning.com. You can schedule a free discovery call, and we’d love to talk with you to see if our services are a good fit for what you’re looking for. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show each and every week. That’s going to help others find what we’re doing here over at YFP. Have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 185: 10 Financial Moves to Make in 2021


10 Financial Moves to Make in 2021

Tim Ulbrich talks through 10 financial moves to make in 2021. It’s time to turn the page on 2020 and start 2021 off the right way and that’s with an intentional plan.

Summary

The start of a new year brings an opportunity to reflect, reset, and start fresh. It’s also an incredible time to dig into your finances and become really intentional with your 2021 financial plan. Tim Ulbrich talks through 10 financial moves you should consider in 2021 and how to make them happen.

Here are the 10 financial moves you should consider for 2021:

  1. Simplify and clarify your goals for the year
  2. Revisit the big questions and discussions with your spouse
  3. Take advantage of any low hanging fruit to get a win or two and gain some momentum
  4. Put your goals on automatic…and get out of the way!
  5. Revisit your student loan game plan
  6. Take your tax strategy to the next level
  7. Button up the insurance part of your financial plan
  8. Evaluate where real estate may or may not fit into your financial plan and goals
  9. Update your legacy folder
  10. Set your learning plan
  11. BONUS: Find a community and get a coach for accountability and guidance

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Tim Ulbrich here, and excited to turn the page on the New Year. Here we are, 2021, hard to believe we’re at the start of the new year. And we know that 2020 was a hard year for many, and I’m hopeful that 2021 brings a better year for everyone.

OK, let’s do this. 10 financial moves to consider for 2021. And spoiler alert: I’ve actually got 11, so we’ll have a bonus one at the end. Now, we know every new year, it’s a chance to turn the page, a chance to reset, and yes, it’s just an artificial point in time, a day that is really no different than any other day except obviously for tax reasons and of course, if something is changing at the 1st of the year, whether that be compensation or benefits. But regardless, those aside, it’s an opportunity to turn the page and let’s take advantage of the opportunity to reset. Now, perhaps resetting means that you’re someone who’s on track and it’s just reminding yourself of the plan that you have in place and celebrating the success and the wins that you’ve had thus far and wanting to keep that momentum going forward. Or perhaps the new year means that you feel like you’re not on track. Maybe you’ve got a plan or a plan that you need to dust off, and it’s a chance or an opportunity to reset course and to recorrect for the new year. Or perhaps you don’t have a plan, and it’s time to get one in place and it’s a time to evaluate what are the different parts of the financial plan and considering all of the things that are out there, what are the low-hanging fruit and what are the areas that you can begin to get some momentum on to be able to have longer term success as it relates to your finances?

So No. 1 — as we go to this list towards 10 financial moves to consider for 2021 — No. 1: Simplify and Clarify Your Goals for the New Year. Now, notice I didn’t say set your goals as I suspect that many of you are already doing that. We talk about that on the show all the time, the importance of having an intentional plan heading into the new year or just in general, an intentional plan as it relates to finances to know your compass and know where you are going. So rather, what I’m referring to here is bringing them into focus and getting specific with those goals to make sure that you’re laser-focused on how you’re going to achieve those. So we know, I know, you know, that there are lots of competing financial priorities, regardless of the stage that you are at within your financial plan. So perhaps you’re somebody who’s listening that has been out of school for a decade or more and you’ve worked through maybe the student loan debt that you’ve had, you’ve paid that off and you’re kind of on a next evolution or phase of your financial plan. There’s lots of competing priorities, even after getting rid of those pesky student loans. Or perhaps you’re someone who is a recent graduate or a student that’s listening and you’re trying to figure out, OK, I’ve got this behemoth of my student loans, and how do I begin to think about other things as I also face what is, of course, this big priority that’s right in front of me? Or perhaps you’re someone who’s nearing the retirement age or you’re in the latter part of your career and you’re trying to identify, OK, I’ve done all of this work, I’ve put these things into place and I want to make sure I go into this next phase of my career, next phase of my financial plan, and I do that in a way that is intentional and I do that in a way that is efficient to make sure I achieve the goals that I want to achieve and of course, lots of tax and other considerations that are there as well. So regardless of the stage that you’re in, whether it’s mid-career, end of career, new career, there are lots of competing priorities. And I’m convinced that the priorities, you know, don’t go away. But it’s a matter of how you can identify those and prioritize those to make sure you’re intentional with what you’re trying to achieve in any given period of time. And here, of course, we’re talking about heading into the new year. So if you haven’t already done so, put them down on paper. And my encouragement for you is to leave this to just a few financial goals that you want to make sure that you prioritize and achieve for the year. So I’m going to encourage three goals and that you write them in a way that provides you with the best opportunity to achieve that goal. So making sure you’re specific about the what of the goal, the when you want to achieve that goal by, and the why — what’s the purpose, why does that matter in terms of the rest of your financial plan and why is this specific goal important?

So let me give you an example here. If I were to say, you know, “Beginning Feb. 1, I’m going to allocate an additional $200 per month towards a Roth IRA so that I can grow my long-term savings in a way that aligns with my retirement goals or plan.” So when I get that specific with a what, with a when and a why — so here, we’re talking about what are we doing: an additional $200 per month towards a Roth IRA. When: by Feb. 1. Alright, how does that look in the budget? Now I’ve got an idea of when and how much. Why? So that I can make sure I’m achieving my long-term savings goals. That is a goal that we’re likely or increased likelihood of achieving because we’re getting specific and we can look at the rest of our financial plan to determine whether or not that is feasible and whether or not that is realistic.

Now, before you set your goals, you’ve heard us say this on the show before, you have to be clear on the why, the so what, the purpose. And we’ve talked about why finding your financial why is so important. And you know, really, what we’re trying to answer here is the question of why does this topic of money even matter to you? Or why does this specific goal and achieving this specific goal even matter? Why is this important? Why is this relevant? And that sounds like a relatively simple question, but if you have thought about this in depth before, you know that it is not. This is the “So what?” question. So before you get too deep into the x’s and o’s of any one part of the financial plan, whether that’s debt repayment, whether that’s investing or savings or insurance, whatever that would be, we have to first understand what we’re trying to achieve. And we talk a lot about our vision at YFP of helping pharmacists on their path towards achieving financial freedom. And my challenge to you is what does that concept, what does that term of financial freedom mean for you? There’s no one right answer. And that can certainly — will be certainly different for many folks that are listening to this episode.

So what’s the goal? So a few ideas to get things stirred up, hopefully to get you thinking about this topic a little bit more. I’ve talked with many pharmacists that say, “You know, when I hear financial freedom, I think about flexibility. I think about options of working or perhaps having the choice to work or how much I work or when I work. Even if I really enjoy the work I do.” Or perhaps it’s to be in a position of control with how you’re spending your time or your money. Perhaps it’s to be able to give, to be philanthropic. Perhaps it’s to leave a legacy or to travel without worry or stress or regret. Perhaps it’s to help family members or friends that are in need or be in a position to do that or to start a business or a movement or a foundation or a charity. You get the point. It’s the financial why, it’s the purpose, and that’s really going to help drive the rest of our financial plan. So that’s No. 1, Simplify and Clarify Your Goals. Set three financial goals for the new year. And then the background of those goals should be the purpose, the vision, the why of your financial plan such that if you achieve those goals, you’re one step closer to achieving your financial why.

No. 2, Revisit the Big Questions or Discussions with Your Spouse if this, of course, applicable to you and your personal situation. Could be a significant other as well. Now, I wrote a blog post way back when several years ago titled, “10 Financial Discussions that I Believe Every Couple Should Have.” And we’ll link to that blog post in the show notes. And you know, these are questions such as when you’re balancing financial priorities or making decisions, of all of the financial priorities you have to consider, whether that’s giving, saving for retirement, housing, transportation, paying off debt, and so on, do you and your spouse or significant other agree upon a plan for how you will balance these? How will you prioritize them? How will you fund those goals, in what order and when? Will you be focusing on several at once or just one at a time before moving on to another one? That’s an example of a big question or discussion to have. Another one, for example, might be around giving. How does each individual feel about giving? How much and where? How will this be budgeted for? Another one might be around the level of engagement. Is one individual taking the lead more than the other when it comes to managing the finances? If so, are both individuals aware of the overall financial situation? How do you talk about this topic? How do you communicate this topic? Are there shared accounts, individual accounts? So I’m just scratching the surface here, and I’ll reference you to that post. But my encouragement would be to look at these and maybe several of these you have had, maybe some you need to revisit, some you haven’t had. But the challenge here in No. 2 is to go back and revisit, discuss, rediscuss these questions with your significant other or your spouse with the understanding that the answers to these are of course going to be significant and inform the direction that you take with many parts of the financial plan.

No. 3, Take Advantage of Any Low-Hanging Fruit so that you can get a win or two and get some momentum early on in the year. Now, again, regardless of where you are at in the stage of your career or your financial plan, I think this is a very important concept for us all to consider. Is there any low-hanging fruit that we can get a quick win or two, get some momentum, so that we’re encouraged and motivated and want to be going on with achieving the other perhaps more audacious or bigger goals that we have set out for the year. So things that come to mind here, things that I evaluated myself in 2020, these could be shopping around auto or home insurance or have you looked at this in a while? If not, good chance to understand your coverage, shop these around, see if there’s any you can save without giving up on the quality of those coverages and policies. Perhaps you’re someone who has wanted to get a term life insurance policy in place or that is a need and it fits with your plan but for whatever reason, you haven’t done that. Relatively inexpensive, we’ll talk about insurance here a little bit in a few moments. Maybe it’s refinancing a mortgage. You know, I’m sure you all heard and read about where rates have gone in 2020, certainly probably into 2021, through the pandemic. And perhaps for whatever reason, you haven’t evaluated that. Is that something to consider? Are there any recurring bills that perhaps you’re not aware of or maybe have lost track of or bills that have gone up over time that you might be able to take a fresh look at and negotiate, things like cable and other services. Are you eligible for HSA savings? And we talked about this in episode 165, The Power of a Health Savings Account. But this is an example of a tax-advantaged account where there’s great benefits, the dollars aren’t enormous, but again, perhaps this small victory, this quick win, this low-hanging fruit that can help accelerate the rest of your financial plan. So do any of these resonate? Or are there any others that you would identify of things that you’ve been meaning to do that you know what needs to be done and you want to just take that next step and knock it out and to continue the momentum with other goals in 2021.

No. 4, Put Your Goals on Automatic and Get Yourself Out of the Way. Now, one of my favorite books, I’ve talked about it on the show many times, “I Will Teach You to Be Rich” by Ramit Sethi, he talks about this concept of automation, automation, automation. He goes through great examples of how to do it. We’ve also talked about it on this show, Episode 057, The Power of Automating Your Financial Plan. But the concept is simple: Once you set your financial goals, when your paycheck comes in, you have a system in place so that your goals are being funded right away and that you have a budget behind that to know that you’re not going to be putting yourself in a position where you’re overspending your income each and every month. Now, for those of you that have been doing this for some time, I think this concept of automation is also very important. It’s this concept of prioritizing your goals, paying yourself first rather than hoping you have money left over. And so perhaps it’s revisiting those goals, revisiting the amounts, the timeline, when do you want to achieve those, and building the systems — again, Ramit talks about that in “I Will Teach You to Be Rich,” we talked about it on Episode 057, how to build the systems so that once you get paid, once you have the goals, you’re automatically funding those accounts such that you are essentially assuring — hopefully — that you’re going to achieve those and behaviorally getting yourself out of the way, which often we individually are the biggest barrier to achieving our financial plan. So that’s No. 4, Put Your Goals on Automatic and Get Yourself Out of the Way.

No. 5, Revisit Your Student Loan Game Plan. Now, here we are at the beginning of 2021, ready to turn the page on a new administration in terms of the President and the President’s team, which may or may not bring additional changes around student loans. We don’t know that yet. But what we know of the first of the year, is that we know that the most recent stimulus package that was passed at the end of 2020 did not extend the administrative forbearance on qualifying federal loans that has frozen for the last nine months or so the interest that was due and any payments that were required on those loans. So it’s really been an incredible time period for those that have qualifying federal loans. For good reasons, payments were not due and interest was not accruing on those qualifying federal loans. So what’s going to come next? We don’t know. There’s been lots of hypotheses that have been thrown out there. There’s been several proposals that have been mentioned throughout the presidential debates and leading up to the election. But we don’t know. As of early January 2021, we don’t know what’s going to happen. Now, we do know that if nothing else happens at this point in time, this administrative forbearance is going to expire. But perhaps this could be continued through an executive order, perhaps there’s additional policies and legislation coming into the future. But we don’t know. So my point here is this is the time period, throughout the month of January, to take advantage of this administrative forbearance as long as it lasts — and if it goes on longer, great. If it doesn’t, you’re ready to go. Take advantage of this time period to come up with your student loan repayment plan or to evaluate or re-evaluate your options to make sure that you’ve got the plan in place that’s going to be the best fit for your personal situation. And we talked about this at length on several other episodes, we’ve got lots of resources on the blog, we’ve got, of course, one of our latest books, “The Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans,” which talks about A-Z student loan repayment for pharmacists. And you can get a copy of that book at PharmDloans.com, and if you use the coupon code “YFP,” that will get you 15% off. So this is the time period to take advantage of this administrative forbearance, as long as it lasts, understand and evaluate all your options, and be ready to go such that when this time period is done, you’re ready to hit the ground running with an intentional student loan repayment plan. Now, for those that don’t have student loans or paid them off, happy dance, right? We’re excited that we’re at this point in time, but perhaps this is also an opportunity to pay it forward and help those that are in this situation — it can be very overwhelming — through providing your input, your experience, maybe getting them a copy of a book like the “Pharmacist’s Guide to Conquering Student Loans,” or pointing them in the direction of some resources that could be helpful to them, things that you’ve learned through your journey, mentoring other folks, but an opportunity to pay it forward to those that are dealing with student loans and typically six figures or more of student loans front and center as they’re trying to attack this and come up with a plan in 2021. So that’s No. 5, Revisit Your Student Loan Game Plan.

No. 6 is Take Your Tax Strategy to the Next Level. Now, Episode 184, just last week, we talked about how to optimize your tax strategy. I brought on YFP Director of Tax and our CFO Paul Eikenberg, who’s our tax professional at YFP. And we talked about the difference between tax planning and preparation, a very important difference. We talked about tax planning mistakes that he sees, we talked about strategies that pharmacists should consider employing to optimize their tax situation. We talked about strategies around legal tax avoidance, tax deferment, and then opportunities to take advantage of those accounts and strategies where you can have tax-free gains. And we broke down each one of these strategies and ones to consider, and so go back and listen to Episode 184 if you didn’t catch that over the holidays. And this is the chance — if you have been someone that has perhaps had your tax filing on automatic and haven’t really thought about understanding all of the different options being a little bit more strategic with OK, now that we’ve completed the filing, what should we be thinking about for the next year in terms of more of a strategic tax plan? Perhaps this is the year where you look at bringing somebody into your financial plan that can really help you be more intentional with your tax strategy. So Paul, as I mentioned, leads our tax planning and preparation services for clients of YFP Planning. And this year, we’re excited to make that service available to 50 more households. And so you can learn more about the tax planning and preparation services that we’re offering and secure your spot by visiting YourFinancialPharmacist.com/filemytaxes. Again, don’t wait. We’re capping this opportunity at 50 pharmacist households. So first come, first served. Again, that’s YourFinancialPharmacist.com/filemytaxes.

No. 7, Button Up the Insurance Part of Your Financial Plan. This is the defensive part of the financial plan. Now, there’s lots of insurance to think about, right? Health, auto, home, renters — but here, I’m really specifically talking about life, disability and professional liability. And this is a part of the plan that I think often gets overlooked because it can be overwhelming to understand what one does or does not need. It can be perhaps not necessarily very exciting, right, to spend money on things that may or may not happen when you look at other priorities such as paying off student loans or investing or saving for the future. So my encouragement is learn first, shop second, and buy last. So first, determine what you do need, what you don’t need. So what does your employer offer? What do they not offer? Where are there gaps? What types of coverage do you need based on your personal situation. We talk about this at length on Episode 044. We talked about how to determine life insurance needs, Episode 045. How to determine disability insurance needs in Episode 155, why you need liability insurance and there of course, talking about professional liability. So learn first, spend time, dig in, understand life, disability, professional liability, understand the nuances of those policies. Shop second. Find an independent broker, and we’ve got some resources on the YFP site that can help you shop the market of what you do and do not need after you evaluate what you do or do not have from your employer, what other coverage do you need, what gaps exist? And then finally, buy last once you’re confident in what you need and the options that are out there.

No. 8, Evaluate Where Real Estate May or May Not Fit into Your Financial Plan and fit into your long-term financial goals. Now, I’ve said this before that as we focused on more real estate on this show in 2020, we’ll be doing much of that in 2021 as well, I’m not suggesting that real estate is for everyone. But I do have a sense that for many pharmacists, evaluating real estate investing — and there’s a lot of different ways to get there — is something that folks are interested in, encouraged in for a variety of reasons, and maybe have been on the fence about should I look at doing real estate investing? Is this a part of the financial plan that makes sense based on a lot of different factors? So looking at the risks, the rewards, what’s the goal? What’s the point? Why do I want to invest in real estate? What’s the point of perhaps generating additional cash flow each month? How might you get involved? Or how involved do you want to be or not involved? Do you want this to be more passive? Do you want it to be more active? Do you have opportunities in your area? Would it be outside of your area? Are there mentors or resources in your community that can help you? And so we have — as I mentioned — featured several stories in 2020, a few that come to mind, Episode 173, Ryan Shaw, all these pharmacists, Ryan Shaw talked about the systems that he has in place for the investing that he does. Episode 178, Nate Hedrick, our real estate expert, talked about his experience flipping a home up in Michigan. Episode 182, Young Park talked about his experience with long-distance real estate investing, lives in Hawaii, invests primarily in Kansas City, and how he has developed systems and how he has built the beginnings of his real estate portfolio. So I recommend you check out those episodes and really determining what your plan is in 2021 if you feel like real estate investing is a good fit. What’s the plan for 2021? Is it learning more? Is it making a move on a property? Is it finding a mentor? Is it more than one of those? So make sure to tune in here, more to come in 2021. We’re going to have more episodes, more content focused on real estate investing. We’re going to be launching a real estate regular show, regular podcast on this YFP podcast. We’ll have more information coming about that throughout the month of January and February. And we’re going to continue to build out more resources for those that are looking to learn more as well as engage and connect with other pharmacist real estate investors. Now, of course another great place to learn — as I’m sure many of you have already heard of when it comes to real estate — Bigger Pockets has great content, great resources, they’ve got forums, the podcast, the blog. And one of my favorite books for those looking to get started, “The ABCs of Real Estate Investing” they published as a book. So lots of places to go here. No. 8, Evaluate Where Real Estate May or May Not Fit into Your Financial Plan and Goals and determine where you’re going to take action as it relates to this goal.

No. 9 is Update Your Legacy Folder. Now, we talked about this. It’s been awhile, but way back when, early on in the show, we talked about this concept of a legacy folder. And I think as we turn the page on 2020, heading into 2021, this is a good time to make sure that you’re updating your systems and your files and you’re making sure that what you have in place is most up-to-date and relevant information. So I first heard of the idea of a legacy folder when taking Dave Ramsey’s Financial Peace University through a local church several years ago. And I remember walking away thinking, wow, so obvious yet so important and at the time was something that I hadn’t yet implemented for our own family and our own financial plan. And essentially, the idea of a legacy folder, whether it’s physical, electronic, or both, is a place where you have all of your financial-related documents so in the event of an emergency, others would be able to quickly assess your financial situation and get access to all of the documents and accounts that pertain to your finances. So examples of items here could include things like insurance policies, wills and power of attorney, account information for savings or debt or could be mortgages, could be credit cards, could be student loans, various savings accounts you have, whether that’s brokerage accounts, retirement accounts and so on. Essentially, a one-stop shop for all of your financial documents and making sure those that should have access or could have access or would need to have access know where that information is and how they can get ahold of it in the event of an emergency happening. Of course, you’ve got to think about security and how you secure that information, whether that’s physical, electronic, or both. So that’s No. 9, Updating Your Legacy Folder.

No. 10 is Setting Your Learning Plan when it comes to personal finance for 2021. Now, at YFP, one of our core values for our team is encourage growth and development. And we believe that for ourselves, for our team, and for you, the YFP community, this concept of constantly growing, learning and developing needs to be at the front and center of one’s financial plan, regardless of where you are at on this journey. Right? There’s always something to learn on this topic. So podcasts, lots that are out there, of course, this one. We hope you’ll tune in. I mentioned the Bigger Pockets podcast, there’s other personal finance podcasts and some resources. When it comes to books, of course there’s the classics: “Rich Dad Poor Dad,” “Millionaire Next Door,” other books that come to mind as some of my favorite personal finance books: “The Automatic Millionaire” by David Bach, “Tax-Free Wealth” by Tom Wheelwright, “The Truth About Money” by Ric Edelman, “The Compound Effect” by Darren Hardy, “The Behavioral Investor” by Daniel Crosby, and one that I recently read that’s not as well known, “Happy Money: The science of happier spending,” written by Elizabeth Dunn and Michael Norton is a great resource, not on the x’s and o’s of the financial plan but more on when it comes to how we use our money, what are some of the things where when we think about our why and our purpose and driving value and happiness, how can money be used as a tool? And what does the science really have to say in that area? So set your plan, look at the options. There’s many out there. I’m sure the YFP Facebook group would have other suggestions as well. And set your learning plan for the year and be intentional about making that a priority in 2021.

No. 11, as I mentioned, I had a bonus here. No. 11 is Find a Community and Get a Coach for both accountability and guidance. Now, when it comes to the community aspect, I hope if you’re not already, you’ll be a part of the YFP Facebook group. I think this is a great community that is really encouraging in some regard, mentoring, helping one another on their path towards achieving financial freedom. I think we’re now a community of about 8,000 strong pharmacy professionals all across the country, so hope you’ll join us. And in terms of getting a coach, we really believe one-on-one comprehensive financial planning is what leads to the greatest accountability and the customization of all of these topics that we’re talking about to one’s individual situations. And so I think this derives the greatest results for the obvious reasons of it’s one-on-one, it’s intentional, it’s consistent, it has accountability, it’s specific to your goals and your plan. But we recognize that it may not be for everyone for a variety of reasons. But if you’re not yet already aware or participating in our comprehensive financial planning one-on-one services, you can schedule a discovery call today, no obligations, see if it’s a good fit for you, a good fit for us. And you can do that by going to YFPPlanning.com, click on “Schedule a Discovery Call,” and we’ll get you on the calendar here in the next month. We also talked about in Episode 181, for those of you that are thinking about is a financial planner a good fit, we talked about many of the topics of financial planning of what we do at YFP but also what are important to look at in general? Fee-only, fiduciary, comprehensive, making sure you’re finding the good fit of financial planning services that are specific to your individual needs. And that was Episode 181.

So there you have it, 10 financial moves to make for 2021 or to consider, plus one in terms of the bonus of finding a community and a coach for accountability and guidance. And speaking of that community, as I mentioned in the introduction, we’ve got an awesome giveaway to go along with this episode to kick off the new year. I mentioned how important it was for my own financial plan and journey to find good resources. And we’re excited to be sharing those with the YFP community. And so we’re going to be doing that through a giveaway in this early part of January where we’re giving two winners in the YFP Facebook group a one-year YNAB subscription, a pair of Apple Airpods, and a copy of “Your Best Year Ever” by Michael Hyatt. So two individuals will win each of those three things. And to enter, you have to be a part of the YFP Facebook group and then comment with your 2021 financial goal on the giveaway post at the top of the group.

So let’s have a great 2021. Let’s approach this year with intention, with purpose. I hope you’ll share your goals, your success, your wins, your questions, with the community in the YFP Facebook group. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please do us a favor and leave a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show each and every week. Have a great rest of your day, and here’s to an awesome 2021.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 182: How This New Practitioner is Leveraging a Team to Invest in Long-Distance Real Estate

compre


How This New Practitioner is Leveraging a Team to Invest in Long-Distance Real Estate

Young Park, new practitioner and real estate investor, joins Tim Ulbrich on this week’s podcast episode, sponsored by APhA, to talk about his portfolio, why he likes real estate investing, how he got started, what has worked, what hasn’t worked, and why and how he invests in Kansas City while living in Hawaii.

About Today’s Guest

Young Park currently serves as an Ambulatory Care Clinical Pharmacy Specialist at the VA Pacific Islands Health Care System in Hawaii. He moved to Hawaii for this specific position after completing a PGY1 residency at the VA Sierra Nevada Health Care System in Reno, NV. He completed his undergraduate study at the University of Georgia, then completed the Doctor of Pharmacy program at Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine (PCOM) in Georgia.

Young started learning about financial independence and investing after making the far move to Hawaii. His big “why” is to help provide financially for his parents and to be able to spend more quality time with his family and loved ones. He’s working towards financial independence through investing in out-of-state cash-flowing rental properties using the BRRRR strategy.

When he’s not working, he serves at his church on the Sound Team, enjoys Hawaii’s beautiful beaches, and learns about personal growth and investing.

Summary

Young Park, a 2017 pharmacy school graduate, stumbled upon real estate investing on YouTube and quickly discovered how powerful of an investment vehicle it can be. Young was originally interested in investing with stocks but decided to move forward with real estate investing because he felt it has the best return on investment and because of the long-term benefits like appreciation, tax benefits, and mortgage pay down.

In less than 2 years, Young has acquired 3 rental properties in Kansas City, Missouri while living in Hawaii. He decided to invest in real estate thousands of miles away for a few reasons. To start, the cost of homes in Hawaii is extremely high and it’s difficult to find a good real estate investment deal. Additionally, he connected and began working with a mentor that invests in the Kansas City market and was able to lean on him for advice while also leveraging the team that was already in place until he could build his own.

Young also digs into how he’s using the BRRRR method on his investment properties, how he’s getting the capital to fund them, how he analyzes a potential deal, how he’s formed a team to support him, the challenges he’s faced along the way, and how real estate investing is supporting his financial why.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Young, welcome to the podcast.

Young Park: Hey, Tim, thanks for having me.

Tim Ulbrich: Super excited to have you on. When I learned about your story as a new practitioner, active in real estate investing, getting started, taking that first step, we’re going to talk about your journey, what’s worked, what hasn’t worked, why you’ve been doing what you’re doing, what your plans are going forward, and I think this episode is going to be incredibly valuable to our community that is interested in learning more about real estate investing or perhaps even for those that have started looking to build upon the portfolio and the work that they’ve done so far. So Young, before we jump into your real estate journey, tell us a little bit about your background into pharmacy, how you got into pharmacy, what interested you, where you went to school, and the work that you’ve been doing since graduating in 2017.

Young Park: Alright. Hey, first of all, thank you again for having me here on the show. I am so excited to share my story today. So man, about myself. I don’t know how far I need to go back. But yeah, as a child, I guess in high school, I actually wanted to go into music, like into music engineering and recording and playing in a band and stuff. However, my parents were definitely against it. We’re immigrants, so we moved from South Korea back in ‘98. And you know, my parents moved to the States so that we can have better opportunity for me and my sister and just kind of live that American dream that they were hoping for us. They just heard about pharmacy from their friend, how their sons and daughters went to pharmacy school and they graduated, got a awesome deal with a brand new car and a brand new BMW. So to them, this was the American Dream for us. Eventually, I kind of followed that step. I went to — I finished my undergraduate study at the University of Georgia, and then I went to the Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine in Georgia campus for my pharmacy school. So I think one of my professors, Dr. Brett Rollins, was on the show before.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, he was.

Young Park: Yeah. So yeah, I went to that school and then after that, I completed my PGY1 at VA Sierra Nevada Healthcare System in Reno, Nevada. And after that, I took this current position that I have with the VA Pacific Island Healthcare System in Hawaii as an ambulatory care pharmacist.

Tim Ulbrich: So Georgia, Nevada, and then Hawaii, right?

Young Park: Traveled quite a bit, yes.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. Well, cool. And so we’re going to talk in a little bit about how do you effectively invest as a real estate investor in Hawaii and why you’ve chosen to go out of area to do your investing in Kansas City, and we’ll talk about why that’s important as we may have many listeners that say, “Hey, I’d love to get started with real estate investing, but you know what, my market isn’t really conducive to that,” high cost of living area, whatever be the reason. Obviously you ran into that, and we’ll talk about how you selected the market that you did and what has been difficult and what has worked with doing some long distance investing. But before we get there, talk to us about for you, why you like real estate investing as an investing vehicle for you going forward and one that you want to build your plan around. Obviously our listeners know there’s lots of different ways to go about investing, traditional accounts, 401k’s, 403b’s, IRAs, obviously they could invest in brokerage accounts, they could start their own businesses, real estate and within real estate, many different ways that you can do this. Why, for you, is real estate an investment vehicle that peaked your interest?

Young Park: OK, so I started getting interested in investing initially into paper assets such as stock, like most people, because that’s the easy one to get into. And I was learning more about that while I was watching YouTube videos, honestly. And I accidentally stumbled upon YouTube videos on real estate investing like Bigger Pockets and some other YouTubers who invest in real estate. And it really got me interested in real estate investing because to me, that had one of the best return on investments, and it’s a hard asset where you can physically obtain the asset. You know, paper asset is great, but it’s almost like a made-up money in the computer space somewhere that determines like this is worth that much. So yeah, that’s why I really got into real estate investing.

Tim Ulbrich: And how do you as an investor — you know, one of the benefits people always talk about with real estate of course is long-term appreciation, tax advantages, you know, that you may not see in more traditional investing — how do those things factor into you wanting to prioritize real estate investing?

Young Park: Yeah, so to me, if I were to compare real estate investing to stock investing, it’s like getting a really high-yield monthly dividend while the tenants are paying down your mortgage. And like exactly what you said, you know, you’re getting the long-term appreciation of the property, you’re getting tax benefits through the appreciation, you’re getting the mortgage paid down, also you’re getting the cash flow — and your cash flow over the long term is going to increase year by year because your mortgage will stay the same and your rent will increase.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and of course — and we’ll talk about your specific properties and how you crunch the numbers. Obviously, we’re talking here under the assumption of you do this in a way that works and is financially viable and of course being able to analyze properties, determine what is a good deal, what is not, is very important as we look at the benefits of real estate investing. Now, before we get into the x’s and o’s and specifics of the property, I like to ask folks such as yourself, what’s the motivation, what’s the purpose, what’s the why? Because we talk all the time on the show about our mission of wanting to help as many pharmacists as we possibly can achieve financial freedom, but I know that that word, “financial freedom,” can mean something different to everyone that’s listening here to this episode. So for you, Young, as you think of that concept of financial freedom and how real estate investing fits into that goal, tell us about what your purpose is, what your why is, what your vision is, and why real estate is really just a piece of being able to achieve that.

Young Park: Great question. So why is extremely important. For most people, they really break it down. The money is never the goal of achieving whatever you want to achieve. It’s actually the time and what you can do with the time that you’re able to obtain through building wealth. So for me, my biggest why is — I will say two things. First of all, I want to provide for my parents financially and also to achieve financial freedom for myself, the time freedom. So my parents moved our family of four to the States with the hopes and dreams of providing a better life and opportunity for me and my sister. Neither of them went to college, and they still don’t speak much English at all. And they did manual labor well into their 60s to provide for us so that we can complete our education. All they knew was to work really, really hard for paychecks and bring food to the table. And because of this, I’m extremely privileged. So because of what they’ve done for us, my main why on investing is for my parents, so that I can help them to retire and live comfortably. And my other why is to be financially independent for myself and for my soon-to-be wife Jamie and our family that we’re going to have so that we can live on our own terms and have options. You know, God forbid, but if something were to happen to my family, I want to be in a position where I can just drop everything and go and be with my family as long as I need to. And building that financial freedom and wealth allows you to have that option.

Tim Ulbrich: And Young, what I heard there, which I love — and I hope our listeners will take heart — is the conviction in which you share that to me tells you’ve No. 1, put thought behind that but No. 2, really likely then provides clarity when you’re making your financial decisions, you know within what context, what frame you’re making those decisions because you’ve thought about, reflected upon, that why. And what I heard from you there was wanting to be able to provide and care for your parents, wanting to get to a point of financial independence such that if you were to wake up tomorrow and for whatever reason, you weren’t able to earn the income that you currently earn, that you would be able to move on without stress and continuing to move on with the rest of your goals and the things that you like doing. And the third thing that I heard was time. And my follow-up question there — because I hear a lot of entrepreneurs talk about time, I hear a lot of real estate investors talk about time, but I very rarely hear people talk about why is that time important. What do they want to do with that time to have that option, to have that freedom, with their time or to gain back more of that time? So for you and your family, more time means what?

Young Park: So more time means spending time with your family and your loved ones. So you can do whatever you would like with whoever you want, you know, going wherever you want to be and how you want to spend your time. You know, for me, growing up, my parents were both working really hard, so they weren’t around home that much. We were still extremely grateful for them, but I want to be a parent that’s there for my children whenever they — let’s say they have a play or they’re playing sports or we get to just enjoy our weekend time or go on vacation together, and I just want to be able to do all those things. Working W2 jobs, it’s great. You get great benefits, and I love my job. But you know, you’re still restricted to certain schedules. You have to meet certain quota, and you know, your schedule can always change — yours and your wife, right? Your spouse, you have to line up our schedules together and all of that’s considering I think that financial freedom and being able to build more time to spend with the loved ones, that’s all I want.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great. And here, we’re talking about real estate investing being one vehicle in which you can achieve that goal of financial freedom, which of course means being able to do the things that you just said were most important. And so let’s jump into July 2019, you purchase your first property. So two years out from school, I want our listeners to hear, you know, obviously you’re at a point where making that transition post-residency into your first job and you pick up on real estate investing as an opportunity to pursue. So July 2019, tell us about that first property, where it was, what the property was like, what you purchased for it, what you spent to kind of get it ready for tenants, and then ultimately, what it means for you from a rental income standpoint.

Young Park: Sure. July 2019 was when I purchased my first property in Kansas City, Missouri. So I have a whole story about getting into Kansas City market, right, from Hawaii. But just to talk more about the property itself and the investment itself, it was purchased off-market. I actually got it from a wholesaler on Craigslist, believe it or not. Yeah. I didn’t know that was a thing. I was looking into a bunch of wholesalers group on Facebook, you could find that. I spoke with a bunch of realtors to get on their list, and you know, I was also searching on Craigslist to see if there are other owners that wanted to sell their properties or potentially wholesalers. So I found that property on Craigslist from a wholesaler. He actually posted it for — are we allowed to talk about numbers?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, go ahead.

Young Park: OK. So he listed the property at $65,000. And I offered $50,000. Of course, I kind of lowballed him. But he got back to me saying, “Hey, if you have the ability to close within five days, all cash, we can do it at $55,000.” And for a new practitioner coming out of pharmacy school, a year of residency, and you have about a year of actual job under your belt, you don’t have $50,000 in addition to me having a ton of student debt. So getting the cash was a — is a whole other story that I need to talk about. But I was able to pull that off, I had $50 in cash, so I close on the property, and we actually negotiated the route crosses. He actually wanted to close out within five days because he had a family reunion coming up the following week, so he just wanted to be done with it. We actually renegotiated so that we got it for $53,000 instead of $55,000. So I got that property at $53,000. And I actually have my mentor, who that’s how I got into Kansas City market. And I used his contractor, who’s been vetted, and they’ve been working 3, 4, 5 years together. So that contractor knows exactly how to turn a property, how everything should look, and I had my mentor, CJ, to be the project manager so that he’s just kind of managing everything and I’m just giving the rehab costs, I guess, on weekly, biweekly withdrawals so that I’m just continually funding it. And once I get some photos saying oh yeah, these were done, then I send in my next draw.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: So I did all that, and everything ended up — the rehab costed about $42,000, I want to say.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: So I’m all in $95,000. So I got that rented out — that was a whole other story about getting it rented out because it was during the holiday season, right around this time actually, and in the Midwest, I’m sure over there, it’s freezing cold, snowing, and no one wants to move during the holiday season.

Tim Ulbrich: Not a great time to find a tenant.

Young Park: It’s not. It’s really not. But you know, right after the new year, so it took a couple months, stayed vacant for a couple months, but I was able to get it rented out in January for $1,000 plus $25 in pet fee.

Tim Ulbrich: So $1,025. So just to rehash these numbers, you purchased it with some negotiation from a wholesaler, $53,000. $42,000 on the rehab, so you’re all in for $95,000. And you’re renting it for just over $1,000. And I’m guessing mortgage, interest, taxes, insurance, probably little less than $800?

Young Park: Correct, correct. But at that time, I didn’t refi yet.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Young Park: So I didn’t have any mortgage payments at that time. So after I was able to rent it out — so the strategy I used is the BRRRR strategy, right? So I bought it, I renovated, I rent it out, so I was able to refinance out and it appraised at $142,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, wow. OK.

Young Park: Yeah. So there was a pretty decent chunk of spread there. So I was actually able to pull all my cash out and then some. So it covered all my purchase, my rehab, and then I think I — after closing costs and everything, I think I pocketed about $5,000.

Tim Ulbrich: $5,000. And for our listeners, we’ve talked about the BRRRR method on the show before, and I’d reference our listeners back to other episodes on real estate investing that we’ve done as well as the Bigger Pockets website, podcast, lots of great resources. They’ve got a book solely on the topic of BRRRR. But you know, the goal here — which Young’s story is a great example of that — is to with the cash investment of the property, be able to pull all of that money out or all that plus some, I guess ideal, or if not all of that, as close as you can, so that you can move on and repeat the process into the future, which you did in a second property, which we’ll talk about here in a moment. But I want to break down this one with a little bit more detail and get into some of the weeds here. When our listeners hear $53,000 purchase, $42,000 in rehab, $95,000 all in, rent a little over $1,000, how did you analyze or evaluate as you were projecting not only purchase price but rehab, potential rent? Talk us through your analysis process and determining what was or was not potentially a good deal.

Young Park: So yes, so you want to start before you purchase it, you want to start with the end in mind. You need to start from the ARV, which means After Repair Value. So you want to know what the property would appraise at at the end of the day. So from that point on, you want to figure out what the rehab costs would be and then that gives you what your purchase price can be. So that would be your offer price. So once I do that, I kind of analyze it. So let’s just say for this property as an example, I actually estimated this property to appraise at about $120,000-130,000. So I actually got really lucky. And $120,000-130,000 is actually — you know, if I really think about it, it’s on the conservative side. I always calculate it in the worst case scenario. And if everything works — if it makes sense for me, even if I were to pay like $10,000, $20,000, $30,000 out of pocket, would I be OK with that? And if I am, then I go with it because that’s the worst case scenario, and you can only get better. Whatever you do better, that’s all extra sauce on it, you know what I mean?

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Young Park: And so yeah. So I do that. So I analyze the property by finding the ARV. And then I estimated the rehab with me and my mentor because he’s done it for so long that he could kind of look at the pictures and see what the estimate would be. And it actually aligned pretty much what we thought it was going to be. So we got that rehab, and we were OK with the purchase price because I was thinking $53,000 purchase, about $40,000 rehab, and appraise it for $120,000. So that’s roughly about 75% of that $120,000 for me to do a full BRRRR.

Tim Ulbrich: Got it.

Young Park: The rehab was a little bit more, but the ARV was a lot higher than I thought. So I was able to actually do a whole run deal on my first deal.

Tim Ulbrich: And that makes sense, Young, if you had projected your numbers at an ARV that was $120,000-125,000 and it came out at $142,000, it makes sense when our listeners hear that you were able to pull out all your cash plus some because of the higher ARV, what ultimately came in at the appraisal when you went to go do the refinance. The other thing I wanted to touch on here, if I had to pick what I think are probably the two most common objections to getting started with real estate investing, they would be that one, I don’t feel like I have the knowledge or experience and two, I don’t have the cash, right, because of whatever. I’ve got student loan debt, I’ve got all of these other priorities of which we talk about on the show all the time, and I can’t necessarily save up $50,000, $70,000, $100,000 to be able to put down on a property. So talk us through how you addressed those two things. You mentioned student loan debt, so I’m sure our listeners are curious, you know, how did you go down this path while you still had student loan debt and how did you reconcile that? But how did you address this knowledge piece? And you’ve talked a little bit about a mentor. And then how did you address the capital and being able to have enough money to get started with investing?

Young Park: First of all, the knowledge portion. So you can get a lot of education just from — and they’re all available online. You can go on YouTube, you can listen to podcasts like the Bigger Pockets. You can read books. I read at least three books from Bigger Pockets and other investment books. However, these to me are just knowledge. And knowledge is important. And people say knowledge is power, but I really think it’s knowledge is just a potential power. It’s only powerful if you are able to take actions and apply it, right? If you just learn, learn and learn, it’s just information. But that doesn’t really get you anywhere. So you have to be able to take that action. And for me, just taking that mentorship was the action step that I needed. Through that mentorship program with CJ, I learned a lot. I learned every week. It was like a weekly phone call. But the biggest thing is that he guided me so that I can actually take the action that if I didn’t take that mentorship and have all these knowledge, who knows if I’d even have a property under my belt right now? Or maybe I bought a turnkey product. But yeah, to me, just learning, keep learning and just taking that step, leap of faith, to get into that deal, get to that first deal, that’s the biggest hurdle.

Tim Ulbrich: And how did you find, Young, that mentor? Because I think a lot of our listeners would say, “Hey, I’d love to have a Yoda in my life on the real estate side.” What steps did you take to say, to move from ‘I’m interested in real estate investing. I’ve read this book, and I’m ready to act and I need to find some people that can help me.’ Talk us through that process.

Young Park: Yes. So I started attending meetups. So after learning, learning, learning and Bigger Pockets, they always talk about, “Oh, come to our meetups.” People are always hosting in different cities. So I actually went on their website, found a meetup there, so I went to one of those meetups, and I learned a lot. And one of the guys that I met there actually pointed out to CJ and Jasmine, telling me that, “Oh, there’s this couple from Hawaii that invests in Kansas City. You should go check them out.” So I went to their meetup, and CJ was actually giving a presentation on investing out-of-state versus locally in Hawaii and how the numbers make so much more sense going out of state. The housing price here is ridiculous. The median housing price here is about $780,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Sheesh.

Young Park: Yeah, and your rents probably won’t even be .5% Rule, if you were to call that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Young Park: So it just made more sense to go out of state. And they were doing exactly what I wanted to do, so I went up to go talk to CJ one-on-one and told him like, “Hey, I’m in this position right now. I really want to invest in real estate out of state as well.”

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: And then that kind of led to us working together.

Tim Ulbrich: So that’s the knowledge/mentor piece. And I think the meetups is a great idea. We’ve been featuring more stories on this show with the hopes that we can connect more investors that can serve as a supporting community for one another. So that’s the knowledge piece, which led to a mentor, which led to some execution. What about the capital piece? I think many pharmacists may be in your shoes, three years out, five years out, seven years out, “Hey, Tim, I’ve got a boat load of student loan debt. I’d love to do real estate investing,” or, “I don’t even have student loan debt, but I just can’t imagine being able to save up $50,000-100,000.” Here, if you’re buying a property for $53,000, you’re doing a rehab for $42,000, you’re all in for $95,000. And the BRRRR method means that you’re bringing $95,000 of cash to get that done. Was that your money? Did you partner with other folks? How did you manage that?

Young Park: Yes, so I definitely didn’t have money. I had some money that I was getting from a W2 job, but this was actually one of the challenges or action steps that I needed to take during the mentorship course so that I can raise capital. So I had to go out and ask family and friends. I honestly — I think I raised $90,000 — I used some of my money too — from family and friends. And I got a ton of rejections. I asked over 30 people. And just to kind of explain to them what I’m doing, but you know, to them, of course I got a ton of rejections because I had zero track record.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Young Park: I had no track record. People who invested in me — invested with me, invested in me because of our personal relationship. They just know me personally and they know my character. So I was able to raise that. And I think another thing that — I keep coming back to the mentorship. Because I had that guidance to show them like, “Hey, I’m not just going there blindly. I have the people there. I have someone who’s guiding me through the whole step,” I think that helped as well. So I was able to raise $90,000.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. Which makes that deal possible.

Young Park: It does. It does.

Tim Ulbrich: So and before we talk about your second property, your most recent property — unless you’ve done more since we touched base last — I’m sure our listeners are as curious as I am when somebody hears, “Hey, Young’s living in Hawaii, he’s investing thousands of miles away in Kansas City,” you know, what challenges — we’ve talked about the opportunity, right, obviously you have a more affordable market, you’ve got a group there that has connections through your mentor, through contractors, so you’ve got some track record and experienced people that know the market. So the opportunities I think are obvious. But the challenges may be not so much, or folks may hear that and think, eh, it’s not for me. You know, I can’t see the property, per se, I don’t know it, I’ve got to trust people, this is my first time. Talk to us about some of those challenges with the out-of-area investing and how you were able to overcome those.

Young Park: Good question. Yeah, of course. I think the biggest challenges that people can’t get out of their head is not being able to see and feel, touch the property. I personally have not been to Kansas City yet. And I did get a third property recently, by the way.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, cool.

Young Park: Yeah. So just working remotely and you have to be able to — at one point, just go with your gut so you can trust people. And I’m not just doing that blindly. I’m starting out with the people I know. So I start with let’s say a realtor or I start with my mentor CJ, and he’s giving me referrals so I try this other contractor, which I used for my second property and now again for my third property. I’m just slowly building a network, building relationships, building my team. And when you’re able to do that, you’re putting a lot of pressure off of you. Right? You have people that are doing the jobs for you. You know, really, at the end of the day, you really don’t have to see the property. Don’t attach your emotion to the property. It’s the numbers. But of course you still need to figure out how can you trust those people? And you just — at one point just have to trust them, right? They’re not intentionally trying to rip you off. They’re good people trying to make their living as well. And we’re giving them opportunity, they’re sharing their experience by working with us. So I think it’s almost the same. You just don’t see them face-to-face. But working remotely has been a good system for me.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and that’s one thing, Young, that I think about, you know, one of the takeaways. And I’d recommend to our listeners Bigger Pockets, David Green has a book, “Long Distance Real Estate Investing: How to Buy, Rehab, Manage Out-of-State Rental Properties.” That was the takeaway I had from that book was it in part forces you to think about your systems and your processes because there’s certain things you just can’t do, right? You’re not getting on the plane often to go to Kansas City. Not happening.

Young Park: Nope.

Tim Ulbrich: So you’ve got to have a team there that you trust, that you have systems for communication, that you have systems for vetting contractors, for paying those invoices. Then obviously with more experience will come more of a track record, and I think that will become a magnet to other investors and other partners along the way as well. So tell us a little bit about your second property, which I knew of, April 2020. Didn’t know you added the third, so congratulations. Tell us a little bit more about those and the numbers as you’re willing to share.

Young Park: Sure. The second property, as you can imagine, was April 2020. Right in the start of COVID. So that deal was so — I was scared, honestly. I thought about backing out from the deal multiple times. But I’m so glad I went with it. So this property was actually listed on the MLS, Multiple Listings Service. I saw that on Zillow, and I spoke with the realtor who posted it. And it was actually a HUD property, which if I’m trying to define it, I think it’s a property that was purchased with an FHA loan. And the person who purchased it couldn’t make the payments, so it was like a foreclosure. So it was bank-owned property. And that property actually had some plumbing issues, so it wasn’t eligible for a bank- or like Fannie Mae-backed loans.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: So you only — you could only buy it cash. So that was actually an opportunity for investors like us because most people who are paying down payments wouldn’t be able to afford that. Right? So that property was listed at $79,000. And I used a current contractor that I have and I had to trust him. I had not used him before. We had some ups and downs, but at the end of the day, he did me right, and we are working on the third property together.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome.

Young Park: Those are the things you actually have to work on as an investor or with anyone, in fact. You know, people have different expectations. Right? So you know, his expectation and my expectations were different. But we talked it out like, “Hey, this is kind of like the finished product that I would like.” He’s like, “Alright, let’s do that moving forward.” So anyways, going back to my second property, so it was about a $25,000 rehab. So $79,000, $25,000, what is that? Like $104,000?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Young Park: So that was my all-in. And I actually got it rented out, and it was rented out in September, I believe. Or maybe before. Oh, I’m sorry. I think it actually rented out in July. And this one was a lot higher because it was during the summer, so I got a tenant in there for $1,100 plus two pets, so $1,150 per month for the rent. And then I was actually able to refi out of that last month, less than a month ago, and it appraised at $144,000.

Tim Ulbrich: You like that $140,000 range.

Young Park: I didn’t go for that one, but it just ends up being that way. And to me, like when I was doing that conservative analysis, I was expecting it to be somewhere between $120,000-130,000.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: So with this one, I was actually expecting to have some of my money left in the deal, which was totally OK with me. But I ended up doing another home run. Maybe I have a couple thousand dollars in the deal at the end of the day.

Tim Ulbrich: So after the second one, if I’m doing my math right here, you’ve got about $286,000 worth of appraised property, and monthly cash flow in rent of just over $2,100, almost $2,200.

Young Park: Right, the gross rent is that.

Tim Ulbrich: Great. And then break down the third one for us.

Young Park: Third one, so I just got it under contract maybe — ooh, maybe two days after I refi’ed out of the other one or before. Somewhere around the same time. And oh man, this was an interesting one. So it was listed on the MLS since March. And it was initially listed at $115,000.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: And no one — there was like absolutely no interest on that property because it was still available by the time I purchased it. So every month, they’re cutting down by maybe $10,000. And in November — or actually, toward the end of October — they listed it at $85,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Wow. OK.

Young Park: Yeah. And I offered $65,000.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: And they came back to me saying, “Hey, we could do it for about maybe $75,000.” And I said, “There’s no way I could, I’m going to do it.” And this one actually was not an owner that was selling. It’s a huge investment firm that’s just purchasing these properties from auction, and they just keep the ones they like and they sell off the ones they don’t. So this was obviously one of the ones they didn’t like. So they were selling it, and I told them, “Hey, it’s $70,000 or nothing.” And then we agreed into the deal. So we got it under contract at $70,000. And then I sent in my contractor and got the estimated bid for it, and it was a little bit higher than I thought because they had a really good photographer, I guess, taking really nice pictures that looked a lot better than what it actually was.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Young Park: So yeah, my bid came back a little higher. So I went back to them and said, “Hey, I want another $10,000 discount or else I can’t do it.” And eventually, after a couple negotiations, they did settle for $60,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome.

Young Park: So I got it from $85,000 down to $60,000. And my estimated rehab is about $40,000 on it.

Tim Ulbrich: And you’re still doing the rehab right now or starting that?

Young Park: Just starting, uh huh. We just — I believe we just finished demo, and they’re buying materials. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. And what’s your estimated After Repair Value on that one?

Young Park: Right around the same, $120,000-130,000.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. And we won’t jinx it, but likely it could come in the $140,000s. So.

Young Park: Right, right.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, that’s crazy. So you got it at $60,000 through negotiation after you got the estimated bid higher than you thought. You said that it was originally listed at what? $115,000?

Young Park: Right, back in March.

Tim Ulbrich: Wow.

Young Park: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Crazy. You know, what I love about this too, Young, too, it’s just a methodical, steady approach to getting that first deal done, learning from it, building from it, developing the team, you know, that’s the value of the BRRRR method. You’re getting your cash back out or as much as you can. Obviously through the refinance, going onto the second, going onto the third. And I suggest you’re just getting started. You know, my next question, as I suspect if you and I were to talk in three years, it’s probably not three properties but maybe it’s 10 or 20 properties and you’re probably helping and coaching others along this as well, is I mentioned two objections that I often hear, which were, “Hey, I don’t have the money to get started,” and, “I don’t feel like I have the knowledge or the experience to get started.” The third one I would add to that would be time. So as I hear you kind of going through all this, I think, man, where are you finding time to do all this not only in getting the deals done but then also in managing them? Talk to us about your approach to saving time, especially once you have them rehabs done and then you’re obviously managing these properties longer term. What have you done to minimize your time that’s invested?

Young Park: Good question. So first of all, I live in Hawaii and invest in Kansas City. So we are four or five time zones behind, so I start really early in the day. I usually wake up around 5 a.m. and get started and spend maybe an hour or hour and a half either analyzing or talking to my property manager or realtor or wholesaler or sending out emails and working on that. So I do that. Some days I come home and then if I see some properties that came through the email, I analyze them. And the other portion as far as maximizing my time, I have my property manager, who is managing everything. I would not recommend anyone to get into managing their own properties because your time is important. Yeah, you might be saving 8-10% of the rent, but you know, if you’re analyzing everything correctly and have that number included into your analysis, hey, it all works out. Another thing is I think more recently, I found a realtor that I really like, who is willing to write these low offers because most realtors think it’s a waste of time with the offers that they don’t think it’s going to go through. And you know, most of the time, it doesn’t. They’re correct. But if they find an investor who can actually close on the property, even though they’re on the lower price point, we could do multiple deals with them over the years. So that’s like an incentive for them as well. But kind of going back to that, I have my realtor, I just tell him, “Hey, John, I want to offer $60,000 on this property.” And then he just sends me the documents, and I just sign it online and he forwards it. So that saves a lot of time for me.

Tim Ulbrich: And I’m seeing a theme here of team. You know, you mentioned the mentor, you mentioned the agent that is willing to work with you on that, you mentioned the property management piece, you mentioned the contractors that you’ve gotten comfortable with, so I sense the team here has been incredibly important. And my last question for you is if we were to fast forward five years, what does success look like for you as it relates to your real estate investing?

Young Park: You know, I have to put more thought into that. I definitely — so personally for me, I don’t have x number of properties that I want because you know, number of property doesn’t mean really much. It’s really how much cash flow you’re getting. I would like to have maybe $5,000 worth of cash flow and I would like to go part-time if I can to free up time a little more and spend more time with my family and my loved ones and also be able to help my parents. I think that’s where I would like to be within five years. Sooner the better. We’ll see.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. And I love how you brought that full circle. I think it’s easy, especially as you’re having some success, you know, you kind of keep going, keep going, but what’s the purpose? Again, back to why you are doing this in the first place. And I sense for you that the time was important, the financial independence was important, the being able to provide for family and making sure that you’re investing in good cash flowing, profitable properties that will allow you to achieve those goals. So Young, thank you so much for taking time to come onto the show to share your story as a new practitioner that’s been active in real estate investing out of the area, what’s worked, and I think your story is going to be an inspiration and perhaps a guide for some that are recent graduates or have been out for awhile and wanting to figure out how they can get started in real estate investing. So again, thank you for coming on the show.

Young Park: Yeah. Thank you so much for having me, Tim.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 177: New Book: Baker’s Dirty Dozen: Principles for Financial Independence


New Book: Baker’s Dirty Dozen: Principles for Financial Independence

Joe Baker, author of the newly released book Baker’s Dirty Dozen: Principles for Financial Independence, joins Tim Ulbrich on the show. Joe talks about several of the principles outlined in the book, why he wrote the book and what he hopes the reader will glean from applying its principles.

About Today’s Guest

Joe Baker is an Adjunct Assistant Professor at the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences College of Pharmacy where he has taught personal finance for over twenty years, as well as an adjunct instructor at Harding University College of Pharmacy. He holds a Bachelor of Business Administration from Southern Arkansas University and a Masters of Business Administration from the University of Central Arkansas. Joe retired early in 2019 from Pharmacists Mutual Company where he provided insurance and financial services to Arkansas pharmacists for twenty-eight years. Joe has spoken to both academic and corporate groups across the country promoting financial literacy.

In an effort to give back to his community, he has endowed a scholarship fund for students graduating from his hometown of Emerson, Arkansas.

Joe and his wife, Brenda, live in Little Rock, Arkansas.

Summary

Joe Baker has been teaching personal finance to pharmacists for over 20 years as an Adjunct Assistant Professor at the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences College of Pharmacy as well as an adjunct instructor at Harding University College of Pharmacy. Tim Ulbrich approached Joe and asked if he’d be interested in writing a book and Joe realized there were a lot of lessons in personal finance he could share. With the help of his daughter Lindsey, Joe wrote over 250 pages of the key principles he teaches and has learned along his journey of personal finances. This book is composed of practical experience and contributions and stories from over 40 people.

In this episode, Joe walks through several of the principles he has written about like finding a path that will fulfill you, getting and staying out of debt, setting up a 401(k) and Roth IRA, finding the right house and picking the right mortgage, protecting your assets and making a difference in your community.

Through November 7th, you can use the coupon code BAKER at www.bakersdirtydozen.com for 15% off your order of the book.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Joe, welcome back to the show.

Joe Baker: Well, thank you, Tim, for the invite.

Tim Ulbrich: Excited to have you. Huge accomplishment as you release your new book, and we’re going to dig in and talk about several aspects of that book, really a comprehensive guide not only for pharmacy professionals but really just a guide overall about how to live a financially well life and how to do it with intention. And we had you on the show back on Episode 082 with Blake Johnson as he shared his debt-free journey. And during that show, Blake articulated how important your guidance was, your mentorship and your role as a teacher in terms of how important that was in the journey for he and his wife to becoming debt-free. And so now we get to talk about how you have compiled all of that wisdom that Blake and other students who have been blessed with your guidance and teachings often speak of as you release your new book, “Baker’s Dirty Dozen: Principles for Financial Independence.” So Joe, first of all, congratulations. I know a lot of sweat, a lot of time went into putting together this book. And here we are, finally getting ready to release it. So congrats.

Joe Baker: Yes, well thank you for talking me into it. I guess I say thank you.

Tim Ulbrich: So I have to ask, now that you’re on the back end of this and we finally get this into the hands of folks and many, many months of writing and editing went into this, and I told you very early on, I said, “Hey, Joe, at some point, this is going to become fun.” And you kept saying, “When is that? When is that?” So as you look now backwards, tell us about the process. What was it like? What type of time was involved? And would you do it again?

Joe Baker: Would I do it again? Yes, I would do it again. But I’d have open eyes this time. I had been thinking about writing a book for years. Former students and current students would say, “Why don’t you put this down on paper and let us have it in a book?” And I didn’t really think much about it until you mentioned — I think it was in May of last year, 2019 — you mentioned and said, “Hey, why don’t you write a book and we will help you promote it?” Then that got the bug started and I started thinking about it and said, you know, I think I can come up with some things. And on August the 15, I started the book. And coincidentally, I started writing the book for something to do in the hospital room. My wife was having some surgeries. And quite frankly, I wrote most of the book in the hospital room. Now, she’s fine today and everything went well. But you know, it was pretty tough having to write a book when someone’s over there moaning in pain. I’d have to call a nurse and say, “Hey, give us some pain pills in here. I’m trying to write my first book.” They weren’t too sympathetic, nor was my wife. But most of it was written, I mean, during the hospital stay. And what’s interesting — I tell people this story — is I thought I was pretty much finished at Christmas. And my daughter, who is just very astute on editing and all that sort of thing, she said, “Well, Dad, why don’t you let me read it and edit it?” I said, “OK. Go ahead.” Well, she started into editing the book, and lo and behold, she would say, “Dad, I don’t understand.” I said, “Lindsey, you’ve got to understand, I wrote this for millennials.” And she said, “Well, I don’t understand it.” So we went almost paragraph by paragraph throughout the book and rewrote it to where she could understand it as a liberal arts major and put in some stories. It was so much involved, involvement for her that I just felt obliged to name her a coauthor because she did, she made it sound so much better. I shouldn’t say this, but one day I was reading through it for the thousandth time, and I said, “You know, I know I’m getting old. But I don’t remember writing this part.” And she said, “Oh yeah, you did not. I put all that in.” I said, “OK.” There is a lot of her in this book, and I’m very proud of what she’s done.

Tim Ulbrich: And shoutout to Lindsey. I appreciated her input along the way. She did a fantastic job. I feel like it’s — as you know, Joe, as I know, especially as you’ve taught on this much longer than I have, it’s very different teaching on this and then putting that into writing in a way that is engaging, that is accessible, that is action-oriented. And I think it takes more effort, but one of the exciting things is this will live on, and it’s going to have an impact on many, many people. And just so folks understand the effort, when you talked about going paragraph by paragraph, we’re talking about paragraph by paragraph of over 250 pages that are in this book. And I think you did an awesome job. One of the first things I said to you after I read it was, “Wow, this is incredibly engaging because of the stories that you’ve included, because of the tone of writing, because of how action-oriented it is.” And you had over 40 people that helped contribute to the book. And I say that as we get ready to jump into talking about some of the key principles because I think this is a topic where multiple perspectives can be helpful to reinforce various points. And I love how you brought in those perspectives and obviously Lindsey put her own stamp on the book as well. So just overall, incredible job. And we’ve got — I think you have photo evidence of some of that hard work writing. I remember you sent me a text at one point with a photo when you were in the hospital writing. And so we’ve got photo evidence of that. So again, congratulations.

Joe Baker: Well thank you. Can I add another story to this? And it kind of goes to one of the reasons I was writing the book is we were playing cards this summer — and by the way, I had my other daughter, Brooke, and her husband, Gabe Crooks, to edit the book. And they did a good job. They weren’t as in depth as Lindsey, but they did do that. We were playing cards, and Gabe and my daughter happened to be there, and we had a big group there playing cards at the table, and one of the card members, one of our friends who is an attorney, says, “Well I couldn’t tell you the difference between an IRA and a Roth IRA.” And all of a sudden, to my right, Gabe, my son-in-law, another liberal arts major, he started explaining the difference, how it’s the taxation, you know, you tax up front and all of that, went into great detail. And I turned to him and I said, “How’d you know that?” He said, “By editing your book.”

Tim Ulbrich: There you go.

Joe Baker: And he’s even starting investing more and more from that. So it seems to have worked.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great. And I think you know from teaching this for over 20 years as we’ve had several of your former students on this podcast, you know, some people will read this book and go line-by-line and take away multiple things that they’ll apply. Others may take one thing or they’ll jump in and out as their financial life and plan progresses. But I am confident, I know I took many things away, and I’m confident the readers will do the same. Joe, remind our listeners — maybe they didn’t hear you on Episode 082 way back when — a little bit of your career path and then also some of the work that you’ve done over the past 20 years in teaching personal finance. I think it’s a good segway into why you even wrote this book in the first place.

Joe Baker: Well, in my adult life, I’ve worked for 28 years with Pharmacists Mutual companies, so I’m very familiar with pharmacists and pharmacy students. And I spent a lot of time in the college of pharmacy. And in the late ‘90s, I was talking to the assistant dean and the dean about a personal finance course. And one thing led to another, and we started in the fall of ‘99 at the University of Arkansas College of Pharmacy, a two-hour elective for P3s. And I’m going to brag not because of me but because of the content, it is the most popular elective at the university. So it’s been going on for over 21 years. And it’s just — it’s been great. I look forward to it. Pharmacy students are like sponges, they just absorb it all. And we just — we have a good time. We tell a lot of stories. And I learn from them as well. So it’s a two-way street.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And I have been teaching a personal finance elective for I think 4 or 5 years, not 20+ years. But one of the things I often think of is, I wish I would have had this. And I know I hear that from others as well. So lucky to have the students that have been able to take your course, that they have access to that information. And Joe, I wanted to ask, you know, we throw around the term, “financial independence,” “financial freedom,” all the time. And since it’s in the subtitle of your book, “Principles for financial independence,” I want our listeners to hear from you, what does that term mean to you? And why is that concept of financial independence so important?

Joe Baker: Well financial independence to me means that if I want to pick up roots, move to another place, I can. I’m not obliged to stay at the same job that I’m in. It just frees you up to do so many things. And I know that money can’t buy happiness, but I have been without money, and that has made it very unhappy. It’s nice to know that if the refrigerator breaks down, the wash machine, or if you want to go on a trip, that you don’t really have to think that much about the monetary. I know I always try to get a good deal, but having the financial independence to do those things and to buy things that you need, it really makes a big difference. It takes the stress out of marriage and life.

Tim Ulbrich: One of the things too, Joe, that really resonates with me as I’ve gotten to know you over the past couple years and obviously got to be alongside of you in this journey, I often tell people as I’m describing this book, is it really is just spewing out with wisdom. And I mean that genuinely.

Joe Baker: Thank you.

Tim Ulbrich: Because I feel like your life experience really comes through in addition to what you have found as effective ways to teach these principles such that they’re easy to understand and they’re action-oriented. So you mention in the beginning of the book, you chronicle your timeline, 30 years old, you got married having nothing but some debt. I think that’s a story that I can resonate, our listeners can resonate. And then if we fast forward, 59 years old, your liquid net worth percentile increases from the top 8% to the top 4% in the U.S. And you mention it took 52 years to get to 8%, the top 8%, and only seven more years to get to the top 4%. And one of the things you mention there is that the significance here was the result of having no debt. So what else as you look back on this journey going from really a net worth of $0 or negative to obviously being in such a good financial position and being financially independent in addition to no debt and having that philosophy around debt. What else has been the secrets to your success?

Joe Baker: Well, I’ll go back even further. You know, it’s a really remarkable journey considering I grew up in a small rural area in south Arkansas near the Louisiana state line. We did not have an indoor toilet until I was 9 years old. And I always, when I’m mentoring students, I say, “Listen. If I can achieve what I have coming from not having an indoor toilet, you can achieve as well.” But fast forward to age 30, you’re right. I had debt. I did have a TV and a VCR and a bed without a headboard. So I did have some assets. But the fortunate turn in my life was I married a high school math teacher. And even though I had a business background, she came in and showed me time value of money and all of the other numbers. And I said, “Wow.” So she whipped me up in financial shape, and I knew she was the one when we were having a get-together at her condo. I think this was the second town we were together. And we had some people over, and someone picked up a paper towel roll, used the second to last paper towel and proceeded to throw it away. And from a distance, I saw my wife — or future wife — go over to the trash, pull that cylinder out and pull off that last piece that was glued to it. And I said, “Wow. I’m going to marry her,” because I knew that she was tight with money. And of course, she makes me frugal today — or excuse me, she makes me look like a spendthrift. But anyway, that helped transform me. And we instilled those — a lot of the money principles with our children. Those stories and more are in the book.

Tim Ulbrich: And a shoutout to Brenna Baker for allowing you to write this book but also for giving you the foundation, I feel like, for what allowed you to learn this topic and of course in turn, teach others. And I love that line that you say in the book, “My biggest financial accomplishment came from marrying a high school math teacher.” So one of the lessons, which I couldn’t agree more with, is making sure there’s alignment with your partner, your significant other, your spouse, when you’re talking about personal finance. And the earlier you can get to that alignment, the better. And you do a great job of discussing that in the book and how important it is. Let’s jump into different areas of the book. And we’re just going to scratch the surface on these. But principle No. 1, so Baker’s Dirty Dozen Principle No. 1, is find a path that will fulfill you. And I think many may pick up the book and not expect that it would start here. So tell us about why you started here and why this concept of finding a fulfilling path is so important and relevant to the financial plan.

Joe Baker: Well, the book did not start off this way. The book was evolved that I had in mind was don’t do this, don’t do that. And then we had a epiphany — excuse me, I’m under the weather today, so you’ll have to forgive me a little bit — when you and I went to Washington, D.C., last year, it was September of 2019, last year, and we both attended a conference with a speaker. And he changed my whole focus on the book. You know, by not telling people what they need to buy or whatever, so I said, “Everyone needs to find their own path, financially, career-wise,” but the purpose of my book is to show you the opportunity cost of every economic decision you make and let you make that decision. I can’t pick a path for you. This is the path that you have to come up, and with the help of the book, maybe we’ll find a way to finance that path. And you can tell a little bit about the speaker who that was. We’ll give him credit.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, so I remember that. FinCon 2019, we were in D.C. You actually, Joe, if you remember, we had I think lunch or dinner, and you handed me in a manila envelope the first copy of the book. And we could go back and pull that out, and to your point, there was not this part included. We sat through this keynote, which was delivered by Ramit Sethi, which should sound familiar to our listeners, author of “I Will Teach You to be Rich.” Fantastic book. And that keynote, Joe, I remember it was one of those moments for me as well that I talk about often when I am speaking on this topic. He was talking about the concept of money dials and really identifying the things that matter most to you and finding a way to prioritize and fund those in the financial plan. And he had a great example, he called on the audience to do a couple of these, and then finding the areas that don’t mean a whole lot to you and to stop spending money on those things. And he connected that to the concept that we talk a lot about on the show about finding your financial why, having a purpose, having a vision for your financial plan, and by the way, as you mentioned and alluded to in the book, this path can and will look different for probably everyone reading and many of our listeners as well. And so finding that path, articulating that path, defining that path is so important because the financial plan should be a mechanism to help achieve that and make it reality. And for some, that means a very ‘traditional’ path of I’m going to work full-time and I’m going to do that for 30-40 years and I’m going to make a good income. Others may say, you know what? It’s early retirement, it’s staying home with the kids, it’s doing this or that, it’s working part-time, it’s having options, it’s having flexibility. And I think we’re seeing this more than ever of the importance of this. And I know it’s something that I feel personally as well. So I think it’s a great concept and I think it’s a great way to start off the book before you then get into the x’s and o’s of the financial plan. I remember we looked at each other and we’re like, alright, this is something different.

Joe Baker: Yes. I turned to you if you remember, I said, “I’ve just changed the direction of my book.”

Tim Ulbrich: Chapter One, here we go.

Joe Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: I think you do a nice job too in this first principle that I know will resonate with our listeners, many of which in the field of pharmacy while this book goes beyond just one for pharmacists that I know many are struggling with what do I do if I’m in a position where I’m thinking about a career change or I want to do something different or “more meaningful,” how do I consider that? How do I weigh that? And how does that, again, connect back with the financial plan? And you do a nice job of covering that in principle No. 1. Now, you also talk about in the book this concept of avoiding financial minefields. And I think this gets into a little bit of the defensive side of the financial plan. My question here for you is in your experience teaching on this topic and working with many students, what are some of the common financial minefields that you see people stepping into?

Joe Baker: The biggest one right now are weddings. Weddings, I think the national average cost is $33,000, excluding the honeymoon. And that is just a big, big financial minefield. Now, obviously if the person reading the book is not paying for the wedding, that’s a different story. But even for parents paying for the wedding or grandparents or whoever, that should be looked at in the light of opportunity cost. And that’s what I break down in the book, showing if you use less money for a wedding and quite frankly, the stress of a wedding, wow. My daughter, well, Lindsey, she’s one that really wrote a lot about financial minefields of weddings. And she was just in a wedding, and she was — it was very similar to the movie “Bridesmaids” where everything was costing so much, spending so much time. So people have to be aware of that. And that chapter also includes on making the decision on whether you do that or not and plus other decisions, and it’s very similar to another chapter I have, principle No. 4 about understanding the concept of opportunity cost. Every decision we make there’s an opportunity cost whether it’s economic or non-economic. And I try to focus mostly on the economic choices. So weddings, one of the biggest minefields in a list I think a couple more. And I think that’s the same area where I go into budgeting to find out where you’re spending all your money. And you might be surprised at all the smaller minefields.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, you do. You do a good job of that, a stepwise approach for budgeting and trying to identify where those minefields may be. And obviously, you build upon that by talking extensively about student loans, a topic that is near and dear to us. And you also do a nice job in another chapter building on this concept of what I view as some of the defensive parts of the financial plan of the importance of protecting your assets. So of course, details about emergency funds, life insurance, disability insurance, liability insurance, insurance insurance. The list goes on and on, right?

Joe Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: We all know how important insurance is. And what you need, what you don’t need. And I think really being able to navigate that, understand it, and as you can tell already listening to this interview, this book covers a wide array of topics. Now, one of the areas you spent the most time in the book on — and I think you did a great job — is on the investing side, the long-term savings and really breaking this down, I would say this is probably the biggest section of the book and I’m guessing the area that you’ve had through experience, identified where there’s the most questions or confusion. And so my question to you as you talk about the principle around investing and establishing an investing plan, you know, we talk about these terms all the time: stocks, bonds, mutual funds, 401k’s, 403b, Roth versions of those, IRAs, traditional and the Roth, HSA, REITs, alternative investments, cryptocurrency — you know, the opportunities and the options go on and on. And I think this can be very, very overwhelming. I know it’s overwhelming from personal experience in talking with many of our listeners. So how do you walk the reader through understanding and applying this information on the very important topic of investing in long-term savings?

Joe Baker: Well, first of all, the way I wrote the book is the way I teach class. I make a promise to the students. At the beginning of each semester, I say, “My goal is for you to never say while you’re sitting in my class, you will never say, ‘When am I ever going to use this?’” To me, that’s very important because you and I, we’ve all been there where we’re sitting and say, ‘When will I ever use that?’ So I keep that in mind, and I try to keep it as simple and really what it boils down to — you know, the three-asset class is cash, bonds and stocks. And if you’re only relegated to participating in an employer-sponsored plan, you’ll have 25-35 funds to choose from. So it’s not like the thousands of decisions you’ll have to make. And I place a couple recommendations. I like stock index funds as well as Warren Buffet, as you know, Berkshire Hathaway, that’s one of his favorites. Target date funds are good too. And I try to make it as simple as possible. And I also include several stories in there from contributors and where they have messed up. And you know, I talk a lot about individual stocks. You know, people at parties, they’ll talk about buying an individual company stock. And it is a good conversational piece, but frankly, might as well just do that for fun because your investments and your retirement should come from your employer-sponsored plan. But I do have a section in the book about picking individual stocks and how to do that. So if you want to do it for fun, that’s fine. But the bottom line is I try to keep it as simple as possible. And I do cover all the areas, and hopefully the reader will have the same experience as the students in my class and say, ‘Oh, yeah, I’ll use this one day.’

Tim Ulbrich: And I think you did a nice job, in my opinion, of keeping it simple, what you need to know, what you don’t need to know. And then through the appendices, also providing additional information for those that want to dig a little bit deeper on some of the topics or where there’s a stepwise approach to things like understanding some of the retirement accounts or opening up an IRA but that there’s a core foundation that you provide. And I think it reads, in my opinion, such that you can go cover-to-cover but then it should stay nearby because you’re going to come back to many of these decisions or need a refresher.

Joe Baker: For example, when you leave an employer, which you will. On average, I forgot the millennials, I think they have 7-9 jobs by the time they’re out. So what do you do with your 401k or 403b? I point that. You have four options. And that is in the book. So there’s some things there that are practical that you can look at and a step-by-step process for that.

Tim Ulbrich: And again, we’re just scratching the surface on topics that are also included that we haven’t discussed yet: how to make sure you and your significant other are on the same page, where to look for things that can appreciate and avoid things that depreciate, how to get out of debt, best practices for home buying, for the financial plan. Now Joe, when we package the book and said, ‘OK, is it the book? Are we going to offer some other resources?’ We ultimately landed on that we thought there would be value in essentially an investing mini-course series, videos, 6-7 videos that would take people more in depth into investing. Tell us about what folks can expect to get out of those investing videos — I know you’ve invested a lot of time and effort into doing those — and why we felt like that was an important supplement to the book.

Joe Baker: Well, a shoutout to P3 pharmacy student Jason Lam, he’s helped me with the audio and video portions. And he has pushed me pretty hard. We have done several videos that we’re — I think we’re pretty proud of. The blooper reel should be very interesting, by the way. But I just filmed it, most of the videos are out back by the pool. I’ve got a big whiteboard. I’m old school, I like to show it on the board. And quite frankly, it’s kind of a mini version of what I taught to the students in class. We’ll see how it turns out. We’ve also filmed a little skit for Halloween day, so hopefully people will check that out.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m looking forward to seeing the bloopers. So yeah, I mean, that investing video series is meant to I think present the information in a different way. Obviously they’ll have the text to read but also more of a stepwise approach. And for those that want to dig deeper on the investing topic, I think you’re going to find that video series to be helpful. And that comes with either the premium or premium pro package of the book, which is again available at BakersDirtyDozen.com. Joe, I want to read a couple of the testimonials. We’ve got a lot of people that had great things to say about this book. You know, one here that I want to read comes from Nicki Hilliard, UAMS College of Pharmacy professor, past president of the American Pharmacists Association. And she says, “Joe Baker is a good-natured, all around nice guy that is passionate about helping others. He has graciously taught personal finance at the College of Pharmacy for many years, and it is always the most requested elective course, not just because of the good information but how these lessons are delivered with great stories and insight into the big picture of what is important in life. He has put to paper his life experiences, stories and wisdom to help others lead a happier, less stressful and more fulfilling life through financial management. I highly suggest you put Joe Baker’s Dirty Dozen lessons to work in your own life.” This is just one, and as I read through others in preparation for this episode, there was a theme that I kept seeing over and over again of the influence that your teachings have had on people and how they have been able to directly apply that information to their personal financial plan. You know, one that stuck out to me, Blair Thielemeier mentioned how important the financial principles that you taught were for her in her journey of being able to start her business and the work that she has done and being able to have her own personal financial plan in order, several students commented specifically on actions they took in terms of budgeting, opening up retirement accounts, other things that they did directly as an account of your teaching. So as you hear that out loud, and I know you’re a humble person by nature, but what does that mean to you in terms of the impact this work has had on people over the past 20 years? And what do you hope is the legacy of this book going forward?

Joe Baker: First of all, Nicki was very generous in her review. And I appreciate that. Well, it just gives validation, you know, when I hear students come back and they’ll repeat a story and say what they’re doing, if they paid off $200-something thousand dollars in student loan debt in four years, which one has, and when they tell me that those stories, that just validates why I did this. Financial illiteracy is — you know, you could be a pharmacist, doctor, lawyer, and still be financially illiterate. Just because you’re smart doesn’t mean — or high IQ — doesn’t mean that you know how to control your finances. So it makes me feel good, it’s the reason I do it. It’s a selfish reason because I know that I’m getting feedback and kind of confirmation of what I’m doing is the right path. So that’s what keeps me going at this. This was all — the first I think it was 10 years that I did this, I didn’t even get any pay, so it was — they came to me, the school came to me and says, ‘Hey, we want you to do this both semesters.’ I said, ‘Well, I was thinking I might not do it at all.’ They said, ‘Well, how about if we paid you?’ which wasn’t much. I said, ‘OK, I’ll do it both semesters.’ So anyway — and the way I look at it is it’s an unlimited attendance in my class. It’s tough, but if I can reach one or two people that would have not been in there if we had had a maximum size, then it’s worth it. So that’s almost like an evangelical feel to it, reaching more and more people.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. And I know in talking with several of your pupils, you know, and speaking from personal experience, it’s not even just them. Obviously there’s the impact that you will have on them but also the folks that they interact with, that they rub shoulders with, the kids that they’re raising. I mean, this is one of the things we always talk about, hopefully a generational impact you can have in helping people shore up their financial plan to be able to do and achieve the things that they want to do. And ultimately, as you talk about in Baker’s Dirty Dozen Principle No. 13, to be able to have an impact on their communities, on their places of worship, on others, and to be philanthropic as they can do so once they have their own financial house in order. So I know your work has had a great influence on me. I mean that genuinely. I’m confident it’s going to do the same, it has done the same, will continue to do the same, with others. And I’m so glad that you ended up writing this because one of the beauties of a book is that this resource will live on. And it will have an impact, and people will be able to build upon this work, they’ll be able to give feedback on it, and ultimately hopefully be a conversation-starter for many in their own financial plan. So Joe, again, congratulations on the book.

Joe Baker: Thank you.

Tim Ulbrich: Excited to be a small part of this alongside of you in this journey. And again, to our listeners, head on over to BakersDirtyDozen.com. Through November 7, you can use the coupon code BAKER for 15% off. And as always, we appreciate you joining us on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your day.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 174: How to Evaluate Employer Benefits During Open Enrollment


How to Evaluate Employer Benefits During Open Enrollment

Tim Baker and Tim Ulbrich discuss how to best evaluate your employer benefits as you get ready to make selections during open enrollment.

Summary

On this podcast episode Tim and Tim discuss open enrollment for pharmacists and how to evaluate employer benefits during this period. They discuss health, life and disability insurance, retirement plans and HSA and FSA accounts. As a YFP financial planning client, a CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER works with you to understand your benefits and choose the options that work best for you and your financial plan.

Tim Baker explains that pricing for medical plans can vary greatly depending on factors like age, location, tobacco use, whether the plan is for an individual or family and the plan category (i.e. bronze, silver, gold, platinum). When it comes to deciding which plan is going to work best for your needs, Tim suggests choosing a plan that will match your use best and to not pay for a more expensive premium if the coverage isn’t being used. Similarly, if you don’t have an adequate emergency fund, it may not be wise to pick a high deductible health plan (HDHP). Tim shares that you have to think about your life plan, age, whether you have pre-existing conditions and how often you’ll need to go to the doctor when deciding on a health plan.

When it comes to life and disability insurance, Tim suggests having coverage if you have a spouse or a family that’s reliant on your income. However, life or disability insurance offered by your employer may not be sufficient. If that is the case, you’ll have to look into purchasing additional coverage. Tim also discusses employee sponsored retirement options like a 401(k), 403(b), or TSP as well as stock options, FSA and HSA accounts.

As we are in or nearing the open enrollment period for many pharmacists, Tim recommends taking a look at what’s being provided or offered by your employer, asking your HR department for help and being intentional with your decisions as these benefits are an often overlooked part of a financial plan.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, excited to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Yeah, thanks for having me. It’s been a long time since I’ve been on I think a full episode.

Tim Ulbrich: So today, we’re talking all about evaluating employer benefits, navigating open enrollment. Obviously the goal is to provide that information heading into that season. So Tim Baker, you talk with our financial planning clients at YFP Planning about evaluating and understanding the employer benefits. So why is this an important part of the financial plan and something that needs to be covered among other topics?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think there’s really two different ways to look at it. You can look at it as like a new hire to a company and evaluating the compensation package in total, so you know, basically salary and all the other benefits that come with the offer, versus kind of your in the company and you’re just evaluating the package that comes up for open enrollment every year. I think we’ll probably focus more on the latter. But I think this is really important. And I sometimes see this with clients or kind of after the fact with clients where they’re like, “Hey, I was making $120,000 per year. And I got this offer to make $130,000 or $135,000.” But then when you actually dig into like what they are moving to in terms of like a new 401k or match or a bonus or the health insurances that are provided, the plans that are provided, you have to dig a little deeper because they potentially take a step back in a lot of ways that are not just tied to the paycheck. I think it’s important, again, to look at this in totality. But I think it’s also — especially when we talk about health insurance, this is most definitely a plan. And you want a plan in place for the purposes of health insurance. When we get into talking things about life insurance and disability, I kind of view that as more as a perk. So not necessarily a plan — and we’ll kind of talk about the difference there. So yeah, super important because what we talk about at YFP, our mission is to empower pharmacists to achieve financial freedom. When I kind of speak day-to-day with clients with their particular financial plan, we go a little bit more granular. Our job is to help grow and protect income, which is the lifeblood of the financial plan, grow and protect net worth, which is essentially what sticks while keeping your goals in mind. So a big part of this of what we’re talking about is the protection. And you know, if you have a health incident or a disability and things like that, we want to make sure that we’re properly protected so some type of catastrophic event doesn’t get in our way. And that’s kind of what this is really all about.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as you mentioned, Tim, we will focus more on the side of those that are post-accepting that position, they’re either recently employed with that company, trying to make that selection as a part of onboarding or probably for most of our listeners, going through the open enrollment season as they look out to the New Year. But Episode 166, when you and I talked about why negotiation is an important part of the financial plan, we did talk about some of these components as potential differentiators or at least things to consider as you’re evaluating an offer and how these are the things that you will start to see some significant variance, perhaps from one offer to the next and so why it’s important to look just beyond that salary. So Tim, whether someone is reviewing their benefits for the first time, again, after accepting a new position or probably for most of us, going through another round yet again of open enrollment, there’s lots of benefits that are connected to the financial plan that one needs to consider. And we’re going to talk about health, life, vision, dental to a lesser degree, and disability, and of course, retirement accounts and HSAs. So we’ve talked about each of these on the podcast at one point or another. But this is another example where we try to bring various parts of the financial plan, take a step back and look at some of these components in its entirety and how they can impact one another. So let’s start with health insurance. And again, I don’t want to spend as much time on dental and vision as I think in my experience, there’s not necessarily a whole lot of option here. And typically, the price tag is smaller, of course, than you’ll see on the medical side. So Tim, why does medical coverage pricing vary so much? And I’m sure that’s something we’ll talk about, the variance that’s there. And talk to us about some of the key pieces that our listeners should be thinking about as they’re evaluating the medical coverage.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think the big driver in why health insurances are different and differently priced across companies is the law states that there are really five things that account for when setting premiums. One is age, so there’s a stat that says premiums can be up to three times higher for older people versus younger. It could be location, so that could be a big thing. I know when we were introducing health insurance, we have employees that work all over the country. And every state has different rules and local rules, and cost of living can also account for this. One of the things, which is kind of interesting to me — and I understand why but things like tobacco use, so insurance can charge tobacco users up to 50% more, some other of those sin activities maybe not necessarily accounted for, individual versus family enrollment, so you can charge more obviously if it covers for a spouse or a dependent. And then probably the big thing is like the plan category.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And I think you want to have I think choice. But you have different categories, and these are typically based on kind of your out-of-pockets versus what the insurance company is paying. And these range anywhere from the bronze, which are typically the high deductible health plans that are typically kept coupled with HSAs, silver, gold, platinum. So these are the different levels that you typically see. Not all companies are going to offer every level. They might offer one or two or even three, but typically, again, the bronze plans usually have lower monthly premiums and higher out-of-pocket costs where platinum are typically higher premiums with lower out-of-pocket. So the insurance for the platinum covers a lot more. But you’re paying more out of your paycheck. So those are typically why we see varying — and I think just with going on with healthcare is everything, it seems like it’s becoming more expensive. And there’s a lot of stats that this is one of the highest — you know, we talk about student loans and things like that. But healthcare is definitely up there with regard to, you know, the inflation of it year after year.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, point well taken, Tim, on that. I know many business owners feel that. In my experience on the academic side, a couple occasions I’ve been involved in helping our HR team evaluate medical benefits for our employers. And you just see some of the data about annual increase in healthcare costs. And I think employers are constantly trying to think of how do we offer a valuable benefit for our employees but also with an increase in costs, you know, how much can they shoulder versus they pass that on to the employees? And so I want to think through a scenario, Tim. If I’m somebody listening or perhaps a client of yours at YFP Planning, maybe I’m faced with lots of student loan debt, I’ve got competing priorities beyond the debt, I’m thinking about maybe getting in a home, I’ve got obviously other priorities that are tugging at my monthly income and at the end of day, there’s only so much to go around. So I think people get into open enrollment, especially on the healthcare side, and they see these bronze, silver, gold, platinum, and you start to ask the question of like, wow, there’s some significant differences potentially in premiums of what’s coming out of pocket per month as well as what could come out of pocket per month if there is coverage that’s utilized in the form of either deductibles, copay or coinsurance. And so I think there’s this constant question of like, what do I want to be paying out per month? And could I use those monies elsewhere versus how much do I want to play defense in the case that something would happen and not have to necessarily have a huge deductible that would come out of pocket? So how do we coach clients through that decision and that choice? And maybe better framed is kind of what questions are you asking or things that you’re getting them to think about?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so it’s definitely one of those things what you want to look at it comprehensively. We always talk about like the financial plan cannot be looked at in silos. So you can’t just look at the tax situation versus the investments versus insurance. You really have to look at the broad scope of things. And you know, that’s why I think having what we use as a client portal where we’re looking at everything at one time is so valuable. And most people, their finances are scattered between banking and investments and insurance, all that kind of stuff. So having that all tied in and having someone look at it objectively I think is important, to start. One of the things that I equate to is if I’m working with a healthy 30- to 35-year-old, for the most part, I’m asking questions about how often are you going to the doctor? Are there any pre-existing conditions? And again, we obviously build up a rapport to the point that we feel comfortable asking those questions. But the idea is we don’t want to have — we don’t want to pay for a Cadillac health insurance plan if we’re never going to drive it, you know? So the joke that I kind of make is for a lot of our clients that because they’re scared of the unknown, they might go and do a gold or a platinum plan, but it’s almost like my parents, who are older and kind of newer to a smartphone, it’s almost like giving them unlimited data. They’re just not going to use it, you know? And no offense, Mom and Dad, if you’re listening to this. But that’s the thing is like you want to match use. And it’s kind of like a cell phone plan. Some people, they’ll buy the Cadillac plan and not use it all, the data and the minutes, etc. So like the — I don’t know if minutes are even still a thing. But anyway, the point is is that we want to match the need with what we’re actually going to use. So those are some of the thing that we go through. And oftentimes, you can step down and maybe free up some more cash flow so there’s less coming out of your paycheck. But then, you know, we just want to make sure that we have things like an emergency fund that we can cover the deductible and obviously the maximum out-of-pocket costs for that year. The other thing that I think plays a part in this that we talk about is just — and it goes back to their life plan — is if I’m working with, again, a 30-year-old family and they’re thinking about having kids, is kind of timing that up. So it’s almost like an annual, like we talk about almost like an annual open enrollment optimization meeting where yes, if we’re looking at adding baby No. 2, maybe we don’t want a high deductible health plan with the HSA. Maybe we just put the HSA on ice, move up a plan or two so we have a little bit more coverage and we feel a little bit more comfortable, again, with those hospital bills and all the doctor appointments, etc. So those are the things that I think come into play. And we have clients that are like, yeah, I just, I go to the doctor a lot because I have this issue or this issue or it could pop up, and it’s almost like what we talk about the emergency fund, if you have a couple and one of them really wants $25,000 in the emergency fund although the calculation says we only $15,000 or $20,000, it’s not even worth the argument. Just pay the little bit of extra and have that comfort level. So those are all the things that I think at the very least, what we want to do here is — and I’m going to say it — we want to be intentional. We want to be asked those good questions and really do that on a year-to-year basis. So those are the things that we’re looking at when we’re kind of discussing the health stuff with clients.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff. And then let’s shift gears to talk about life and disability. And I want to first mention, we’re not going to obviously get in the weeds on all things life and disability insurance. Both can be a topic of their own, and they were a topic of their own, Episode 044, How to Determine Your Life Insurance Needs, Episode 045, How to Determine Your Disability Insurance Needs. We also have a lot more information on the website, YourFinancialPharmacist.com. But Tim, one of the most common questions I know that I get, I’m sure that you get, is do I need to purchase additional life and disability insurance beyond what my employer covers? So we’re getting into this what do I need and is what my employer provides enough? Or do I need additional coverage? So again, through the lens of how you’re coaching a client through this, how do you coach them through it? Are there questions that you ask to help uncover this answer?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so it’s going to be my stock answer of it depends. So if we look at life insurance from that perspective, actually life and disability I’ll say kind of the blanket statement that I kind of led the episode with is this is where we kind of venture from it being a plan to a perk. Just like we’ve seen with pensions and some other things, like it could be that in five, 10, 15 years, that these types of benefits are no longer offered by the employer. It’s just one of those things that it’s a suck on the cash flow of the employer and they go away. And this is me speculating, but when we look at life in particular, typically what I say to clients is sometimes it angers or annoys me when I see a client that is 28 that has no kids, no spouse, really just student loans and they’re paying premiums on a permanent whole life insurance outside of what the employer provides. So the caveat, you know, what I typically say to clients is when you have a — for life insurance, when you have a house, a spouse, and mouths to feed, that’s typically where you need some life insurance. So there’s other people that are dependent on you and your income. Now when it comes to the group policies, most of these are actually provided to you for free. It’s just one of the benefits. And it’s typically kind of the more on the not-so-great is like a flat $50,000 benefit that your beneficiary would receive. Or it’s typically a multiple of income. So it’s typically 1 or I just met with a client that had a 2.5x base, 2.5 times their base income was their benefit, which is pretty good. So if I make $100,000, I either get 1x or 2.5x, it just depends. And then you also have the ability to buy up voluntarily. So to me, you know, the problems with group policies is that there’s limits on actually how much you can get. Most of the individuals that we work with, they check off those boxes that they’re going to need $1 million+ in insurance at least. So there’s limits on the group policies. There’s portability. So if you just a group policy and you work with that company until you’re 42, and now you go and work with another company at 42 that doesn’t offer health insurance, I would rather you have bought that policy at 32 or 35. Now you have to go out and buy another policy yourself individually, it’s going to be that much more expensive. And the thing in life insurance is that typically, to buy it on your own, it’s not going to break the bank for most people. So the group policy for life insurance, it’s nice, it’s a perk, but not necessarily — most people are going to need to buy something outside of that. For disability, the same is true if not even more so. So typically, this is based on a percent of your income, so a 50-60% benefit. The biggest issue I have with group disability policies is that the definition of disability, which is sometimes really hard to find out what that is. So if you go back to that episode we talk about own occupation versus any occupation. So the big difference — so own occupation is the inability to work or engage in your own occupation versus any occupation, which is the inability to engage in any occupation. So the big thing I say to clients is if you have an any occupation — Tim, if you have an any occupation disability policy, and you get bumped on the head and you cognitively no longer can do your job, and you submit a claim, they’re going to say, “Well, Tim, we’re sorry about your situation, but we’re denying your claim because you can still bag groceries,” or something like that. So a lot of these group policies will be own occupation for a set period of time, maybe two years or three years. And then they switch to a any occupation. And to me, it’s kind of like a wolf in sheep’s clothing because you’re thinking like, oh, I have this long-term disability policy that’s going to cover me for a long time. And to me, I would almost rather them give you some type of stipend to go out and buy your own. So those are typically the conversations that we have with clients, for most of the clients that we work with, if not all, there is no spouse, mouths, house to feed kind of check box. Typically, if you are a pharmacist, you want to protect the income that you have worked so hard to basically earn. So for most people that we work with, that is definitely something that is often the biggest risk that is not necessarily felt by that particular client. Those are the things that we have to kind of like educate and talk through. So — and so much with the life — to kind of wrap up this answer, so much with life and disability is that you always think it’s going to happen to somebody else until it happens to you. And then that’s where we go down the path of like, this is a catastrophic event. How do we pick up the pieces from here? And those are just not conversations that we want to have.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff. And again, Episode 044, How to Determine Life Insurance Needs, Episode 045, How to Determine Disability Insurance Needs, we talk about some of those definitions in more detail, tax considerations, transferability issues, how to calculate your need. Tim, ironic you use the example of bagging groceries. So my very first job outside of working for the Ulbrich family business was bagging groceries at Top’s Supermarket, shoutout in Buffalo, New York. I loved it. One of my favorite jobs. And to this day, when I go grocery shopping, I have a hard time watching them bag groceries because I know, I know I can do it more efficiently. So one of my favorite work experiences. Alright, so let’s talk retirement. And again, a topic we have talked about at length on the podcast, long-term savings. We did an investing series, episodes 072-076, all about investment vehicles, retirement vehicles, tax consideration, fees. And most recently on Episode 163, we talked about investing beyond the 401k/403b. So Tim, my thought here is spending a few moments as people are going into just evaluating their benefits as a whole, we obviously know depending on where they work, they might be looking at a 401k, a 403b, a TSP, a Roth version of that. But taking a step back to say, before they just jump in, what are some general considerations that they should be thinking as it relates to those options available, options available outside of the employer? And again, how this fits in with the rest of the financial plan.

Tim Baker: So this can be fairly significant with regard to your financial plan. Like we work with clients that, you know, the 401k is stellar. And I actually had one of these meetings last night. The 401k for the wife was stellar, and good match, costs associated with the 401k were very minimal, good choice in terms of the investments that were there, versus the husband that his 401k was something like 30x more expensive. And the match was similar, but it was more — it kind of became more discretionary, meaning they would kind of evaluate it from year to year. Again, not a great investment selection, so these are the things — and I would say that this is really, really hard to kind of discern for yourself. So we have tools that we use that are very helpful, very expensive but very helpful to kind of help us crack the nut on the 401k. So it allows us to really kind of connect to these types of plans and evaluate them for the client and actually say — and the discussion that I had last night with a client was like, I said, “Look, you’re putting in 8% into your 401k, and they’re matching 4%. But the money that goes inside of that 401k is just being eroded at a rate that’s like 30x more if we put it into an IRA.” And that’s associated with the costs there. So what a client — and it’s easier to talk about this with round numbers, but if the client had $100,000 in their 401k, every year that 401k was basically charging that client like $1,200 versus his wife, which was like $20. So if you extrapolate that over 20-30 years, those are real dollars. And the problem with this is unless you can dig into the IRS forms that the plans file every year, it’s really hard to figure out what you’re actually paying. And that’s, to me, it’s a really big problem. So just like the health insurance kind of question, you’re kind of operating in the sandbox that they provide you with the 401k. So you’re going to be provided sometimes multiple options, it could be a 401k, a 403b, a 401a, you know, there’s different flavors. But you typically have, again, a set amount of investments inside of that, 20-30 funds that you are selecting from. And I would say it’s more important I think to have lower cost options within that versus a variety of — you know, one of the most efficient retirement plans out there is the TSP. And they have like six funds plus some target date funds. So it’s not a whole lot of choice. But the costs there are super low. So those are the things, as you are evaluating your employer’s plan, you have to kind of say, you know — and the discussions that we have is kind of what I was saying with the client that I recently met with is does it make sense to again get the match, get the free money, but then look outside to other accounts, whether it’s an IRA, even a taxable account, if there’s a side business maybe there’s a SEP IRA option or something like that, again, this is a little bit harder just because the information that you’re looking for is often buried in an IRS form. But it’s really, really important because if you look at the scenario that I brought up, that’s potentially hundreds of thousands of dollars, and that’s not an exaggeration if you extrapolate that over a career. So that’s really important. And for a lot of us, the 401k is going to be the biggest asset that we manage. And it’s important to get that right. So just a lot of moving pieces.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think, Tim, this is easy — I’m just speaking from personal experience — easy to kind of put this on autopilot of eh, it is what it is, it’s what I have. And I think really spending the time to dig in and understand not only the basic things like what are they matching? But also the investment options or choices, and you start to get into asset allocation, understanding fees. And some of that’s transparent, some of it’s not, so seeking help where you need to have help. We’re really investing the time because every year that goes by where there’s something like fees that are being taken out of what could turn into longer-term compounded returns, obviously there’s an exponential factor in that. So it’s worth spending the time. And that’s my challenge to the audience going into this year to really dig in deep here if you haven’t yet. Tim, I’m thinking of a small but important group of our audience, specifically probably some of our friends in the pharmaceutical industry space that may have some stock options available to them. I know we get this question often when we’re speaking with fellows — and a shoutout to MCPhS, a fellowship program. We’re actually going to be talking with them next week. And so that’s what had me thinking about this. You know, of course we know these options can vary from employer — one employer to another in terms of not only what they offer but of course the individual company and the outlook on that company, so there’s no black and white answer here. But what are some general considerations around stock options that folks should be thinking about?

Tim Baker: Typically, the big distinction that we want to make here is it’s not necessarily stock options that we’re dealing with. Typically, stock options is where you can buy a stock at a much discounted price sometime in the future then potentially sell it for what it actually selling for on the market. And there’s a variety of ways to kind of look at that and do that. Typically, what we see in higher levels of management, community pharmacy in kind of the big chains or in industry is RSUs, Restricted Stock Units. And this is not to be confused with employee stock purchase programs, which is kind of a savings account that you defer money into and then at the end of the quarter, you buy stock at a discounted price. It’s kind of almost like another way to save. So what an RSU is, what we’re talking about here, is think of it as compensation that is in the form of stock. So if I’m trying to hire you, Tim, to my pharmaceutical company, I might say, “Hey, Tim, I’ll pay you $130,000 and then we’ll award you $10,000 of stock over the next five years,” that’ll have some type of vesting period. So let’s pretend that we — after Year 1, we give you 100 shares. And then you know, that vest — and then what that means is that you have to work for a set amount of time for that to actually become yours. It’s in your account, but if you leave, it’s not necessarily there. The next year, maybe now have 200 shares and maybe that first 100 has vested. So if you leave, you can cash out that first 100. So it’s a creative way to provide compensation outside of what’s in your paycheck. So a lot of the considerations that we have to look here is again, what is the vesting period? They’re kind of golden handcuffs. What are the tax consequences? So when to basically sell them and if you have to pay capital gains tax and what that looks like. So those are all kind of things that we want to coordinate with not just the portfolio and the allocation that you have but also the tax ramifications that are there as well. So the RSUs are a beautiful thing, and we’ve been working with clients that get awarded, and it’s great to have that money there. But it’s also how does this plug into the greater financial plan and how can we do it in the most efficient way possible from an allocation but then also from a tax perspective.

Tim Ulbrich: And as we wrap up this section on retirement options and savings, employer-sponsored retirement, for those that are listening that perhaps your employer doesn’t offer one — I’m thinking about some of our independent pharmacy folks or you look at your option and say, “Wow, these are crazy. Is there a better way forward?” We’d love to talk with you about that. I mean, I think that’s an area that we’re interested in seeing an opportunity to help. So you can shoot us an email, [email protected], and we can set up a time to discuss that further. So Tim, last piece here before we talk a little bit about the open enrollment logistics and some considerations for the actual process itself. I want to spend a couple moments on FSAs, HSAs. I think these are often confused. I know we’ve talked about this on the show before, but it couldn’t hurt as a reminder as some folks may have an HSA available, some may not. Some may have an FSA and don’t want them to confuse that with what an HSA is. So talk to us about an FSA/HSA difference and considerations as they’re evaluating these options.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think the big difference between the FSA and the HSA is FSA I think — or FSA is a pass-through account, meaning it doesn’t accumulate over many, many years. So you essentially set up an FSA, which could be for healthcare, it could be for dependent care, through your employer. And it’s an arrangement that lets you pay for many out-of-pocket medical expenses or childcare expenses with tax-free dollars. So it’s allowed — from the medical side, it’s allowed for things like copayments and deductibles, prescription drugs, medical devices, etc. On the dependent care, it’s things like daycare costs, camps, etc. So with the FSA, if the money is left at the end of the year, the employer can typically do one of two things, not both. They typically can either give you another couple months, like typically 2.5 months to spend the leftover money. So let’s pretend I have $1,000 in my FSA at the end of 2020, I’m given until mid-February to spend that money. Or what they can do is they can let you carry over up to $500 into the next plan year. So if I have $1,000, I have to spend $500, and then I can carry over the other $500 into 2021. Anything above and beyond that is lost, which is why I just don’t like these types of plans. I mean, they’re good to shelter you from tax, but you’re kind of like — you’re kind of trying to guess some of the things that are maybe not as predictable as we might think. So it’s one of those things that we would fund with things that we know we’re going to have to pay. So if we know we’re having daycare that costs us x amount of dollars, we know we want to fund it at least for that. Or if we know that we’re going to have these particular costs for health, we want to fund it with at least that. So that is the FSA. The HSA, on the other hand, is an accumulation account — or it can be. It can also be a pass-through account. So the HSA is the only account that has a triple tax benefit, which means it goes in pre-tax, it grows tax-free and then if it’s used for qualifying medical expenses, it comes out tax-free. So it completely misses the tax man at every step. So the big difference, though, is that I could put $2,000 into it this year, as an example, and not spend it. And then next year, I could put another $2,500 and not spend it and actually invest it. You know, invest it almost like an IRA — similar to an IRA — and basically use it as an accumulation account. So a lot of people use it as a stealth IRA. And this is what we do is that we try to cash flow our medical expenses and just leave the HSA alone. And the idea is that it’s just another bucket of money that we’re funding that can be used for retirement sometime in the future or it could be used for hey, in 2022, we had a health thing that pops up that we really need to pull that money from. So there’s a lot of flexibility and power in the HSA. With the HSA, you have to have a high deductible health plan. So if you have one of those gold health plans, you’re not going to be able to fund an HSA. The deductible won’t be in line. So those are the big differences between the FSA and the HSA.

Tim Ulbrich: And we talked, Episode 165, Tim Church and I talked about the power of the Health Savings Account. Make sure to check that out. We talked in more detail about what you had summarized there, talked about some of the contribution limits, the definitions of high deductible health plan and got in a little bit as well of the differences between that and an FSA. And I couldn’t agree more, Tim. I think for people that have access to an HSA, if they can leverage the benefits that you suggested, great. Many people may not have access to one and so really looking at the FSA as is that an option for saving for planned expenses you know that are going to be coming up in the following calendar year? So we’ve talked about a lot, Tim. We talked about health insurance, life and disability, retirement, as well as the FSA/HSAs, and I want to wrap up by summarizing the open enrollment process. What exactly is it? And then what are some considerations for our listeners as they head into this season of open enrollment?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so open enrollment is typically a time, it’s a time period that every employer has. It’s usually held annually. A lot of them have them this time of year. Sometimes they’re in the summertime, sometimes in spring. But for the most part, we see them in kind of the September-October-November time period. So it’s a time for the employee to basically select their benefits or their health plan or whatever for the next year. So you know, the open enrollment period sometimes can be glossed over and they’ll just say, “Hey, well, I’m just going to kind of keep the status quo.” The problem with that is that oftentimes these plans are changing, you know, every year they’re changing with costs and everything kind of moving. But I think the way that we approach it with clients is one, to be a — kind of to be a sounding board for them. And we often, what we’ll do is we’ll log onto the benefits portal with a client, and we’ll just kind of go — we’ll review the packet that maybe they’ve sent out to us and we’ll read through it and we’ll kind of just provide comments and ask questions. And then sometimes we’ll actually log on and actually go through their open enrollment and say, “Hey, let’s opt into this. Let’s opt out of that, we don’t need to be paying for that, etc.” So the thing that I would say for listeners is to really take a look at what your employer is providing. And if you have questions, this is another thing that we do — because sometimes it’s not apparently clear what the benefit is or what it covers, etc. is put your HR people to work. I often ask the question — and I actually have this conversation. I’ll say like, “Is your HR person any good?” And they’re like, “No, not really.” So we can formulate good questions and then basically if we can take them all the way to finish line in terms of what they need, great. But if sometimes we have to go back to the HR person and say — and have the client or the employee say, “OK, like can you explain this a little bit more about –” we just had one that’s about the definition of disability and what that looks like. And this particular client, their company was going through a merge, so there was a little bit of kind of just unsure about what it’s going to look like going forward. But to me, this all goes back to the I word, which is be intentional, review your stuff, kind of take stock of where you’re at in your life, what you think you need, what you don’t need. I would say one of the things that I often see is that this is one of the things that is overlooked in the financial plan. And it’s kind of a microcosm of insurance. It’s like, ah, I don’t need insurance, or ah, it won’t happen to me and ah, I don’t want to take the time to read through it. And I get it. I mean, some of these packets that we get are 100 pages long. It’s 100-page PDF. And we can basically go through it fairly quickly and kind of pull out, extrapolate the information that is most important, provide good, sound recommendations. But it is one of those things that is important and you know, you want to — to me, it’s about optimization and making sure you’re using best use of everything that is kind of available to you, whether it’s, again, salary, insurance, etc. So those are the things that I think should be top of mind for someone as they kind of go through this period of open enrollment.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s a great recommendation. It reminds me a little bit of the advice that we give to recent graduates of hey, don’t wait until the grace period’s up to make your decision and do your homework. So now is the time to really be understanding some of these nuances, the options that are available, looking at it in the context of the rest of your financial plan, reaching out, getting some help, so that once you get to that open enrollment period and you have that meeting or that webinar and you get that packet of information, you’re ready to hit the ground running with evaluating that further and making those decisions.

Tim Baker: The HR person should be able to like contact the insurance or even like the 401k, like I’ve come back with clients and I’ll say to the 401 provider, “Why are these fees the way they are when there are options that are much, much cheaper?” So you know, you — I mean, the HR person might not be able to answer the question directly. You know, sometimes it’s like, well, I don’t know that. But then to me it’s push the issue. And it’s like, well OK, can we talk to the people that do know these questions, whether it’s an insurance question or a 401k question, etc. So to me, it’s like don’t be shy about this. This is important. It’s a crucial part of your financial plan and your livelihood. So to me, those are questions that we want answers to. So I would just say, kind of squeaky wheel gets the oil type of thing and make sure that you’re putting the professionals that get paid to provide these services, put them to work and make sure that you’re satisfied with the outcome.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, especially for those listening that feel like they have some cruddy options available because those are the individuals that are often making the decisions, they’re getting in front of the reps that are providing them with the options, so you know, there might be an opportunity to do some direct or indirect education on oh my gosh, I had no idea about the fees or what other options may be out there. Because at the end of the day, you know, to defend some of these HR folks, many of them are busy with a lot of things and sometimes it’s easy to renew a package rather than really taking the time to evaluate what else may be out there and be of benefit to the employees. So Tim, great stuff, as always. And to the YFP community, we appreciate you taking time to join us on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. If you liked what you heard on this week’s episode, please do us a favor and leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show each and every week. And if you are not yet a part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you will join us. Over 6,000 pharmacy professionals strong, helping one another and committed to helping one another on their path towards achieving financial freedom. Have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 173: Using Systems to Automate Real Estate Investing


Using Systems to Automate Real Estate Investing

Ryan Chaw, pharmacist and real estate investor, joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about how he built a six-figure rental portfolio, red flags to look out for as an investor, and the method he uses to find good tenants.

About Today’s Guest

Ryan graduated with his Doctor of Pharmacy in 2015 at age 23

He was inspired by his grandpa who bought 3 properties in the Bay and achieved financial independence for himself and was able to help cover college tuition for his grandchildren.

Ryan bought his first property in 2016. It was a single family home at his local college. He rented out the house per bedroom and renovated to add extra bedrooms to increase rental profit.

He repeated the same process for each property, buying 1 property each year. He then created a system for getting consistent high quality tenants, managing the tenants, and decreasing expenses through preventative maintenance. He now makes $10,755 per month in rental income.

Three of the properties are on 15 year mortgages and one is on a 10 year mortgage. Ryan took a HELOC out on the first house to help buy the 4th house. He paid off his first property in 2020.

Ryan is now teaching others his system: how to find a college town to invest near, analyzing a deal, generating tenant leads through strong marketing, and how to self-manage college tenants so everything is hands off and automated.

In his free time Ryan travels to many foreign countries to just absorb the culture and life outside of California. So far he has been to China, Japan, Taiwan, the Bahamas, Canada, Paris, London, Germany, and Mexico.

Summary

Ryan Chaw joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about his why and motivation behind real estate investing, how he built his portfolio so quickly, how he balances a full-time pharmacist career with real estate investing, red flags to watch out for when purchasing a rental property and Ryan’s unique method for finding high quality tenants.

Since graduating pharmacy school in 2015, Ryan has purchased four single family homes with 18 tenants and brings in $10,755 a month. Although he hasn’t been able to purchase a property this year, Ryan paid off his first property in full which brings in about $2,500 in rental income monthly. He also now has a large HELOC that he can access to fund a future deal if needed.

Ryan shares that despite being a full-time pharmacist and real estate investor, he does in fact have a work/life balance. Ryan set up systems and standard protocols in place so that he can run things on autopilot. He has systems created for maintenance issues and advertising which allows him to only have to spend an hour a week on his properties. Because of these systems he doesn’t feel the need to hire a property management company which would cut into his cash flow.

Ryan shares several red flags to watch out for when purchasing real estate like: water stains, mold, dry rot, strange odors, uneven flooring and if the property is being sold as is. He also explains his process for finding high quality tenants which he refers to as his PRIME method which stands for:

P – placement of advertisements

R – review of social media

I – identifying type of tenant

M – measuring responsiveness

E – ensuring proof of income

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Ryan, thank you so much for coming back on the show. How are things going?

Ryan Chaw: Things are good. I’m excited to be on the show again.

Tim Ulbrich: Happy to have you back. Appreciate you reaching out to give me an update on kind of where you’re at, and we’re going to talk all about your portfolio, what you’re working on on the real estate side, how in the world do you manage that given your competing responsibilities also as a pharmacist. And you know, I’ve been wondering, Ryan, so last time we talked, you had mentioned your love for international travel. So here we are, obviously in the midst of a global pandemic, travel hasn’t been what it was. So how are you spending your time and really finding that release from work without travel as an option?

Ryan Chaw: That’s a great question. Yeah, I’ve been going on a lot of hikes nowadays, kind of just get clarity and work on my mindset and see where I want to go with my real estate business and everything. So yeah, I’ve been doing that. Also just spending time with friends, either outdoor dining or sometimes just online, we play this game that’s kind of like Mafia, it’s called Among Us. But yeah, it just kind of is chilling.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. And I’m glad you mentioned mindset because I have found also, you know, I think 2020 is going to be a year for many of us that we look back in five or 10 years, and there’s a lot of reflection going on. I know for me in 2020, I think just the midst of everything that’s going on, perhaps more time, less activities, whatever be the reason, but a great time to develop, to set mindset, to reflect on where things have been, to reset if you need to reset, and to look ahead into the future. And so today, we continue our focus for the YFP community, as we mentioned, in 2020, we want to bring you more real estate investing content. And so again, Ryan, we had you on the show, Episode 140. We talked all about how you’re bringing in almost $11,000 a month through college town real estate investing, such an awesome conversation, great story. I personally think it was really inspirational to a lot of people that are itching to get into real estate investing while still working full-time as a pharmacist but maybe aren’t quite sure as to where to start. And so I hope folks will go back and take a listen to that episode, Episode 140, if they haven’t yet done so. And we’ll link to that in the show notes. And so Ryan, I want to chat with you about a few different aspects of your real estate investing journey, including your strategy behind building the portfolio that you’ve built, especially in an expensive market, some red flags that ended up costing you quite a bit of money on your first deal — and we’ll break that down — as well as your unique prime method that you use to find great tenants at your properties, which as we know obviously can be the difference in terms of not only headaches but also in terms of cash flow. So let’s hit the stage and talk about your portfolio and recap some of your journey for perhaps those that didn’t join us on Episode 140. Take us back. Remind us when you got into real estate, why you got into real estate, and what your current portfolio is made up of.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, sure. Let’s start with why I got into real estate because it really was an inspirational journey for me. I got started from my grandpa, actually. He bought a couple properties back in the ‘50s before Silicon Valley was even a thing. And as we know, all those properties went up in price like crazy, and he became a multimillionaire and was able to retire early. Not only that, he was able to cover part of my college tuition and that of my brother’s. So it really showed me that real estate is one of the best ways to create generational wealth, not just for yourself but for your children and future generations as well. Unfortunately, I wasn’t able to ask him how he did it before he passed away, but you know, I wanted to get started as soon as possible. So I got my pharmacy degree in 2015, I graduated as a RPH or PharmD, and I just wanted to get started as soon as possible. So I worked a lot of long hours. I actually had two jobs. I worked as a retail pharmacist and as a hospital pharmacist and really grinded it out because I had this dream and vision for myself, right? So I wanted to get started in real estate as soon as possible because I knew that the prices will go up over time, rent will go up, all of that. And so real estate’s really a time game, and you’ve got to get started as soon as possible. So I bought my first house in 2016. It was a $262,000, three-bed, two-bath house. And I bought it in my local college town because I figured if I rent out per bedroom, I could get a lot more rental income than if I rented out the whole house to like a family or something like that. And so I bought one house every year by reinvesting the cashflow, investing my W2 income, and I actually took out something called a HELOC, which we can talk about later, it’s called a Home Equity Line of Credit. Because my first house went up in price by about $60,000, I was able to access the equity, take it out, and put it onto my fourth property. So now I have four single-family homes with 18 tenants that makes $10,755 per month at max capacity.

Tim Ulbrich: I love it. Thanks for the recap. I mean, I love the energy in your voice, kind of the why. We talked about that on Episode 140, what’s the why, what’s the purpose beyond making money, but what’s the vision as it relates to your financial plan? I love the focus on a desire for generational wealth. And you know, while you weren’t able to ask your grandpa what the playbook was, you know, here we are, recording this, right? So this is going to be available not only to others in the community but as I’m sure you’re already thinking, how you can pass this down in information to your kids and their kids and how important that is to be able to teach others the principles that we learn along the way. And so Ryan, in 2020, here we are. I know you had mentioned a goal of acquiring one property each year, but this year has been different — let’s be kind and say it was different, right? It’s been a challenging year, we’ve got a global pandemic, you live in an expensive market, so I’m guessing your plans and visions for 2020 may not have panned out exactly as you had thought they would before especially the pandemic hit. So tell us a little bit more about what has happened in 2020 as it relates to your portfolio?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, definitely. So coronavirus hit and unfortunately, the college that I invest near did shut down and went to online classes only. There are a few classes that are still on campus, and so I was kind of like worried. Like am I still going to get tenants, right? So I contacted my existing tenants and asked them all, you know, ‘Do you guys want to extend your lease? Do you still want to stay or not? Because you guys have the option to cancel your lease because I can’t — obviously this was unprecedented, we didn’t expect this. So I’m giving you the option to cancel.’ So you know, just kind of working with the current tenants and saying, ‘Hey, I can go around your budget as well if there’s budgeting concerns.’ I basically made that connection with them, and that’s how I was able to actually keep a lot of the current tenants. And not only that, when I advertised, I advertised in Facebook groups, and I offer them to give me a call so I can talk to them to see if this is a good fit for them, right? So I would basically on the call go through any of the concerns about the house. A lot of the concerns are like security, is this a good neighborhood, what are the other tenants like, and all of that. But because I took that extra step to get on a call with them, I was able to basically fill up almost all of my bedrooms during this year. So I have 17 bedrooms, and I filled 15 of them so far.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. And I think that speaks to your focus on relationships, not only finding good tenants but also maintaining those relationships. And before we hit record, you also mentioned this year, you were able to pay off one of your properties in full, correct? Tell us more about that.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, I was actually able to pay off the first property. It’s kind of like for peace of mind, honestly. There’s definitely this debate between should I just leverage my money to the max and basically just buy as much property as I can with the money I have? Or should I pay off some of them so I don’t have to worry about not being able to pay the mortgage? If there’s a huge recession or something like, I’m not underwater. So for me, I kind of wanted a little bit of peace of mind, so I paid off my first property. And it doesn’t mean I can’t touch that money. I can still access it through my HELOC, right, my Home Equity Line of Credit. But it does give me that peace of mind and that extra cash flow. The first property was making around $2,500 per month in rental income, so I have that $2,500 per month in just passive income basically, minus some expenses, obviously. But yeah. I mean, that kind of was one of my goals is to pay them off, right? So I was definitely happy for that.

Tim Ulbrich: Congratulations. And you know, $2,500 a month of rental income, no mortgage payment, that’s a great position. And I think I appreciate your comment about, you know, even though you paid that off doesn’t mean you don’t have access to the equity if you wanted to tap into that. But obviously you’re weathering a little bit of an unprecedented situation here I’m sure and will be on the offensive going into the future. So tell us more about the financing of those four properties. Did you approach the financing the same in all of those? And tell us about how you were able — you mentioned the HELOC, but in terms of the mortgage structures, and I think that will help give folks an understanding of what options may be available to them.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, definitely, especially with pharmacists having such a high salary, a lot of them making a good six-figure income or a little bit less than that, we have options to purchase these houses, we have that opportunity that a lot of people may or may not have, right? Especially as an employee, you actually get pretty good financing options. What I did is a conventional mortgage through Fannie Mae/Freddie Mac, those are just two government-sponsored enterprises out there that basically set the rules for how the loan can be done or what loans are given out, right? And so I just did the conventional financing and was able to reinvest my cash flow every time to purchase a property sooner and sooner each year.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. And if I recall from our conversation before, majority of those you had on a 15-year mortgage, maybe one that was shorter than that. Obviously you’ve paid one off since then. But is that correct?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah. They’re all on 15-year mortgages. I kind of that, again, with the peace of mind idea, I want to pay them off as soon as I can. If I were to pay them all off, it would take me until I had around 31, and then I would have that six-figure, that $10,755 per month just coming in in passive income. And so then at that point, I could retire, basically live life on my own terms, be able to do what I want where I want with whomever I want to do it with and have that choice whether I want to go on to work or not.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, financial independence by definition, right, right there. So tell me more, tell our listeners more — you know, I’m guessing some folks are thinking, my gosh, rates are at the lowest we’ve seen in who knows how long, it probably doesn’t get any better than they’re at right now. And so as you were kind of reconciling paying these off early — and you’ve alluded to this a little bit with peace of mind versus it’s a low interest rate debt, I can free up some monthly cash flow, whether that be for purchasing properties, maybe contributing into other retirement funds or other investments or ventures. How have you reconciled this balance between peace of mind/aggressive repayment versus you know what, it’s pretty cheap debt and I might be able to do something else with that money?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, definitely. I mean, I’ve definitely been looking at the current market. And it’s kind of like as Bruce Lee says, you have to be like water. You want to definitely have a plan but be flexible with your plan, right? Water takes the form of the container it’s in, which means like you have to be able to pivot. Like if there’s a — maybe let’s say the housing market crashes, right? All of these houses are on sale. Well then you do want to start leveraging your money. You do want to buy as many properties as possible. So that’s why I have that HELOC. You want to be in that position where you can go either way. So right now, the market’s very hot. Houses are actually being bought in cash for over asking price. So I’ve been definitely having trouble finding a house to purchase this year. But I’m definitely always looking, and if I can find a good deal and an opportunity add where I can add extra bedrooms like turn a three-bed to a five-bed house, then I will jump on it right away. So yeah, I guess that’s my best advice, just what Bruce Lee said, be like water.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. I mean, be flexible, be nimble, and put yourself in a position, right, so when the time is right — it doesn’t mean you’re always on the offensive, but you’ve got yourself in a position, whether that’s cash, whether that’s a HELOC that you have ability to access some equity, but you’re in a position, ready to go, when that time does make sense and obviously when that deal presents itself. So Ryan, you’ve built a six-figure rental portfolio in a matter of four years. I want our listeners to remember you’re a 2015 PharmD grad, bought your first property in 2016, which is really impressive in and of itself, but you’re also working full-time as a pharmacist. And so the obvious question here is, how are you doing that? What’s the work-life balance like? Or is there even one?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, that’s a great question. So there’s definitely a work-life balance. So the thing is, if you have systems in place to go to protocols, standard protocols in place for when something goes wrong, then you can automate everything and be able to do this while you’re working as a full-time pharmacist because I did it, right? I have four properties. I have 18 tenants. And I’m able to do this on the side simply because I have these systems in place for when something goes wrong. So for a quick example, let’s just say a toilet broke down, right, or there’s a toilet leak. So I teach my tenants, I empower my tenants and give them responsibilities, if this happens then you should call this number, bill it to this contractor. So I kind of have like a list of numbers of contractors that they can go to for that. Or if they were to like text message me, I would just forward that text message to the proper contractor because I have this contractor team that takes care of issues for me. And I know what the strengths and weaknesses of each contractor, so I know where to put whom.

Tim Ulbrich: And so when it comes to that contractor team, you know, I’m wondering as somebody who’s at the very beginning of this journey, how do you build that contractor team that you trust, right? So I’ve talked to several folks who are like, I’ve got this contractor, I trust him, I know that it’s good work, it’s a fair price. But you know, as somebody who’s new into this space, you’re like, I don’t know. I might Google search, I might ask some people on Bigger Pockets or whatever, so how did you build that team? Was it through experience? Was it through referrals? Tell us more about that.

Ryan Chaw: No, real estate’s all about connections. And going back to what we were talking about earlier where I connected with the tenant on the phone, right, and really give that human touch, it’s really all about connections. So what I did is I actually talked to my neighbors, and my neighbor’s friend was actually a contractor in the area, and he did a lot of projects. So I just had him kind of, just tested him out, had him do some smaller projects, and then eventually some larger projects. He did a great job, and you know, he charged a fair price and all of that. Right? But if you’re kind of just starting out, I would say just talk to your real estate agent. Your real estate agent will likely know some contractors in the area. Talk to your neighbors, talk to people around the area, build those connections. Also when you talk to contractors, make sure you talk to — if it’s a major project especially — talk to at least three. Get like — they’re called bids. Get three bids, and choose the one that seems to know what they’re doing, is able to explain what they’re going to do, and is a good price point. So the point of getting the three bids is so you can compare. Also, you can ask for something called an itemized bid, and this is just like another tip. An itemized bid is where they separate out the cost of materials and the cost of labor. And so the cost of labor shouldn’t be too much, like it shouldn’t be over $100 per hour most times. And then the cost of the materials, you can just look that up on Google or you can even pay for the materials yourself, ship them over to the contractor and have them give you a bid for labor.

Tim Ulbrich: Great advice and input. And one of the other things I was wondering that I suspect our listeners are as well, you mentioned that when an issue comes up with a tenant, you’ve kind of educated them or given them information on where to go, ideally take yourself out of it, but if they reach out to you, you can then just work with that one contractor, forward their information. So does that remove the need for working with a property management company? Or is that in addition to working with a property management company?

Ryan Chaw: To me, it actually removes the need for a property management company. I feel like I do like even a better job than most property management companies out there because I have these systems in place. If you do want to hire a property management company, they can take anywhere from like 8-12% of your rental income, right? And that, to me, wasn’t necessary because I have systems in place for advertising my properties, vetting and finding high quality tenants, I have systems for if issues come up, if tenants complain about other tenants, right? And because I have all that in place right now, that’s all automated, I really don’t have to do much work other than just keeping track of the finances.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great. That’s awesome. I think the investment you’ve made there, I can tell it’s something you have a strength in, you know? And for some folks, they may build that system, others may factor in the property management into their deal analysis but making sure you’re accounting for that piece of it is really important. So you’ve got these four units, obviously you sat tight here in 2020. What are your future plans? Do you plan to continue with single-family homes where you’re renting out the rooms, this model that you’ve been doing? Or are you looking to branch out into other property types?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, that kind of goes back to the being flexible part, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, yeah.

Ryan Chaw: I would say first, I will diversify, definitely invest in different college towns, not just my own. Maybe go to 7-10 houses, somewhere around there would be kind of like my end portfolio. You really don’t need that much to achieve financial freedom, honestly. And like I said, I’m able to do it by the time I’m 31 or so. And I started this when I was 24. So that’s like 7-8 years or so. Any pharmacist could really achieve financial freedom, especially if they use these strategies of renting out per bedroom because you’re basically doubling your cash flow on the property.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great. So let’s talk about your first deal. And you know, one of the things I mentioned — and I feel like we probably don’t even do enough of — is that real estate investing isn’t always rainbows and butterflies, right? Sometimes you walk into a bad deal, issues come up with tenants, you’re faced with a major maintenance, unforeseen rehab costs, I mean, really, the list can go on. So talk to us about the red flags that cost you big on your first real estate deal and how you learned from that and what you’ve then applied to future investment properties that you’ve evaluated.

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah, definitely. So my first deal was a 100-year-old house, so you can imagine it already had a lot of problems on it. So I got this call at 11 p.m. on a weekend from one of my tenants. He said, “Dude, man, there’s sewage shooting out the kitchen sink, and it’s all over the kitchen floor right now.” So I was like calling up a cleaning crew, plumbers, at like midnight on this weekend. And of course I had to pay premium pricing because it was on the weekend at midnight. And so the plumber stuck down a camera down the pipe, and he found that the sewage pipe whole line was rusted over and there were roots sticking into it, and it was broken, basically. So it had to be replaced. It cost $9,000 just to replace that line with like PVC and everything and to clean up the mess and everything too. So I was like, oh man, I’m $9,000 under, right? Not only that, there was a lot of these openings around the outside of the house where rats got in and feral cats actually brought fleas in. So I had a flea and a rat infestation at the same house in the same year.

Tim Ulbrich: Lovely.

Ryan Chaw: I know, right? It’s like, come on, man. There’s so much stuff. And then last thing that I didn’t notice was the house actually had no A/C. So I had to — and this was in Stockton, so it gets up to 100 degrees there. So the tenants were complaining like crazy. I ended up having to install a mini-split system that cost me $15,000. Yeah. So like you know, don’t make the same mistakes I’ve made. Obviously I could have easily figured out if there was an updated HVAC system on this house. I was also really terrible at advertising, so I had put up a sign on the lawn, a “For Rent” sign. That didn’t work very well because I ended up getting a lot of calls, but the calls were from people who weren’t very qualified to live at the property. Yeah, it was just from random people. And most of them couldn’t even afford it. And most of them weren’t even students. Lesson learned, get a sewage line inspection during the escrow phase because you can tell if a pipe is broken, and you can use that as a negotiation point at the point of sale, so the seller either cuts you a check at closing or they pay for some of the closing costs to make up for the broken pipe or for a rusted-over pipe with roots sticking into it. Other red flags, look for any signs of water stains or mold because water honestly is one of the worst forces of nature that can totally destroy a house and its structure, especially if untreated. So usually when I go through a house, I kind of have this red flag checklist I look through. Is there water stains? Any signs of mold? Is there any dry rot? You guys can look up dry rot on Google. It’s basically a fungal infection of the wood that can destroy the structural integrity of a house. Are there any strange odors in the house? That can mean poor ventilation. Is the house — do they have uneven flooring? That could be a foundation issue. When the property is listed, is it sold as is? That means the seller is not going to be willing to pay for any fixes that come up during the inspection. So there’s a lot of things I look for on the house definitely.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and what I hear there, Ryan, I guess there’s a couple ways to kind of implement solutions going forward. One is you live the mistake and then you make sure it never happens again or you hear from other folks such as people listening to you and they’re like, OK, got it, checklist system now that I need to have in place. But I think what I hear you really trying to describe — of course there’s going to be maintenance, things that are going to go wrong from time to time, tenant turnover and so forth — but what are those “catastrophic” things that are really going to eat into either your cash flow, returns, your emergency funds, or cause significant issues that you can try to identify and advance. And what process do you have in place to make sure you’re going to do everything that you can to identify what those things would be before you obviously close on the property. Or I guess if the deal is good enough, you account for it in the financials to make sure that you can take on that repair. So that’s helpful. And I really want to spend a few moments here as we wrap up learning about your process for finding high quality tenants because I think, you know, second maybe to fleas or rehab costs or things going wrong, second to that, a common objection is I just don’t want to deal with tenants and multiple tenants and turnover of tenants and what that means. And so I think finding high quality tenants is really an important process. So you have a PRIME process to do that, PRIME. So give us an overview of that method and how and why you created it. And then we can talk further about that.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, for sure. And this is one of my systems I use to basically automate the whole process. And once you automate everything, honestly I spend less than an hour per week on my properties in general. So creating this system is really key to creating a profitable, successful real estate investment. And so that’s why I’m kind of going through each system and checklist that I have in this interview. So let’s start with the PRIME method. P stands for Placement of advertisements, R stand for Review of social media, I stands for Identifying the type of tenant they are, M stands for Measuring responsiveness, E stands for Ensuring proof of income. So let’s start with the P first. P is Placement of advertisements. You need to place you ads where your target tenants hang out. I made the mistake of just putting a sign on the lawn, right? But putting ads up where your target tenants don’t hang out, it’s like fishing in an empty pool. You’re not going to catch anything, right? Or catch anything that you want, at least.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure, yep.

Ryan Chaw: So what I do is I actually go onto these Facebook groups, Class of 2022, Off-Campus Housing, Rooms for Rent, basically these Facebook groups where the students, college students, will hang out and look for housing. I also contact — last year, I contacted the student government and asked them, can they put some of my ads or fliers up in the school buildings where the college tenants hang out? And so that really actually got me quite a few tenant leads through that. So that’s very important, just placing advertisements, thinking about where your target market hangs out, it’s very important. R stands for Reviewing social media. So that means I go through their Facebook profile, social media, to screen for are they like a party type of tenant? Are they smoking, doing drugs or alcohol in their pictures? Right? Or are they going to a bunch of raves and all that? Are they like more of a studious type tenant who is very focused on their studies, they’re maybe in a professional school like a pharmacy, dentist, medical student, right? A third- or fourth-year student usually are more mature than first- and second-years. They’ve usually got their party life out and all that as well. Just because if I can get one or two studious students in that house, they kind of stop the other students from throwing a wild party because they’re like, “Dude man, I’ve got a midterm tomorrow. I’m not going to stand for us having a drinking party right now.” Right? So that’s important. I stands for Identifying the type of tenant they are. So there’s different types of people out there. There’s ones who will look for the cheapest deal, right? They’ll go for the Motel 6 rather than the Ritz Carlton. But there’s others out there who will go for the Ritz Carlton, right, because they want the best quality deal that’s out there.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Ryan Chaw: So the one who wants the best quality, obviously I would put them in the master bedroom versus the one who wants the cheapest deal, I’ll put them in a smaller bedroom but also the cheapest price bedroom. Sometimes, I have so many tenants that I don’t even have to — the tenants always asking for a discount or a cheaper deal, I could just find another tenant who doesn’t care so much about the price of the rent. But honestly, my houses are half the price of on-campus housing. On-campus housing is around $1,200 a month. And I charge only around $600 a month. So really, it’s a really great market out there. We are providing affordable housing for a lot of students.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Ryan Chaw: M stands for Measuring responsiveness. So that’s the more responsive a tenant is, usually the more responsible they are, the more mature and professional they are, because would you rather have like let’s say you contact a tenant for rent, late rent. Would you rather have them take three weeks to get back to you and say, “Oh, I didn’t see this message,” or something or someone who gets back to you right away. So you measure the responsiveness of the tenant based off of how fast they get back to you on the paperwork you send them or anything you ask of them, right? And then E stands for Ensuring proof of income. So that means you ensure that the parents make enough money to afford the rent. Usually, it’s the parents paying, which is great because what parent is not going to pay for their child’s — you know? And risk their child being evicted from where they’re staying in college, right? Parents are also great because they help clean up after their children too, believe it or not. They’ll vacuum the whole house. I’ll go like, wow, OK, I didn’t have to do anything.

Tim Ulbrich: And easier to communicate with, right? You’ve got a second option if need be.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah. Exactly, exactly. Yeah. And I have like an authority figure I could go to if there are issues with that current tenant too. But I haven’t had to do — I only had to do that once in my whole five years of renting out to students. So yeah, I usually ask for the last two monthly bank statements and FICO score or credit score. The kids also will give me student loan documents or financial aid documents to prove that you can afford the rent, that type of stuff. It’s important to ensure proof of income, especially during COVID if you guys are investing during this time. There are people who have lost their jobs, right? So you do want to make sure that they have a good amount in the bank and that they’re not going to ever have trouble affording the rent because that’s not good for both of you, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. So again, that’s the PRIME method for finding high quality tenants. P is for Placement of advertisements, R: Review social media, I: Identify type of tenant, M: Measure responsiveness, and E: Ensure proof of income. So Ryan, one of the things I was thinking about as you were talking, just by the nature of who you’re often recruiting as a tenant, obviously a college town, health profession types of students, I would assume that would almost refer themselves, that you — the advertisement may be important up front and perhaps if you have a vacancy, but I could see where P4s, P3s, P2s, even if they’re in a medical school, M4s, M3s, where they are often talking among themselves. And it’s like, if there’s a good deal and it’s a nice property and they feel like you’re a good landlord, then they’re going to refer that to their peers. So is that something that you find to be true?

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah, definitely. Nowadays, I get about 50% of my tenants just through referrals, basically guys that say like, “Hey, I have this friend who also wants to stay at the property because I enjoy staying here. And I was wondering if I could bring some of my friends in.” And I’m like, “Yeah, totally fine. Just have them shoot me a message.” And so I’m able to actually get a lot through referrals. So it’s kind of like one of those businesses — at the beginning, you do have to put in a lot of work to establish your reputation. But then, if you treat your tenants right, you treat them with respect, then it really snowballs to a point where it’s pretty much all automated. The tenants start looking for you instead of you having to do that push and advertise and look for them.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great. And thank you for sharing that input in both the method for finding tenants, some of the red flags that you look for when you’re acquiring a property, looking at properties, as well as your current status of your portfolio. So great to have you back on the show. And I want to wrap up by — I always like to ask guests, you know, what resources would you recommend to those that are looking to get started or even continue their journey in real estate investing?

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah. So I would say Bigger Pockets does provide a lot of resources. I actually went on their podcast yesterday. So keep an eye out for that episode.

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, no way!

Ryan Chaw: I talked about student housing. Yeah, I did. On the Rookie podcast.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Ryan Chaw: On the Rookie podcast that they just started out. Yeah. And then there’s some books you guys can definitely pick up. “Rich Dad Poor Dad” is definitely a go-to. There’s “Millionaire Real Estate Investor” by Gary Keller. Gary Keller is one of the big names. He actually owns Keller Williams realty company. There’s also — let’s see — there’s some mindset books I can recommend. There’s the “High Performance Habits” by Brendon Burchard. That one’s a great one. Oh man, there’s a lot out there.

Tim Ulbrich: But those are good. Those are good recommendations. And we will — I subscribe to the Real Estate Rookie podcast, so when we see that go live, we’ll link to that in our show notes as well. So.

Ryan Chaw: Oh, that’s awesome.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. No, that’s awesome to see a pharmacist investor featured on the Bigger Pockets site. And what’s the best way for our listeners to contact you and follow the journey that you’re on?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, definitely. So I have this free PDF for anyone just trying to get started in real estate investing, especially the student housing market and some about the strategy that I use. You can actually get that at my homepage at www.NewbieRealEstateInvesting.com. That’s www.NewbieRealEstateInvesting.com.

Tim Ulbrich: Very cool. So just logged on there, we’ll link to that in the show notes, “The unique and highly profitable strategy I use to go from newbie real estate investor building a portfolio that generates just under $11,000 every month.” So we’ll link to that in the show notes. Ryan, thank you so much for coming back on the show, for sharing your journey, and I’m sure this won’t be the last time. So I appreciate your time.

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah, for sure. Thanks again, Tim. I appreciate being on the show, and I hope your audience got a lot of good tips there. And you know, real estate’s all about connections, guys.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And to the YFP community, as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode, please go and leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts, wherever you listen to the show each and every week. And if you haven’t yet done so, make sure to join us in the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, over 6,000 pharmacy professionals that are committed to helping one another on their path towards achieving financial freedom. Have a great rest of your day.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 163: Investing Beyond the 401k/403b


Investing Beyond the 401k/403b

Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker talk about investing beyond the 401k or 403b and break down the traditional IRA, Roth IRA, HSA, SEP IRA and taxable/brokerage accounts by discussing their contribution limits, how to appropriately use them and the advantages and disadvantages of each.

Summary

Tim Baker joins Tim Ulbrich on this week’s episode to break down investment vehicles beyond the 401k and 403b. To start, Tim Baker explains that investing is just one part of the financial plan and should not be looked at in a silo. However, when he works with financial planning clients he helps to get their nest egg on track so that they are financially prepared for their retirement some pharmacists feel overwhelmed that they will need $4 or $5 million at retirement. The certified financial planners at YFP Planning help to provide actionable steps to help you get you on track while keeping the rest of your financial plan in mind.

Tim runs through several investment vehicle options that are outside of the 401k or 403b employer-sponsored plans. He digs into the IRA, Roth IRA, HSA, SEP IRA and taxable/brokerage accounts and discusses their contribution limits, how to appropriately use them and the advantages and disadvantages of each. Tim also talks through YFP’s view of the priority of investing, common mistakes and assessing risk tolerance and risk capacity.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, welcome back to the show. Two weeks in a row!

Tim Baker: Yeah, crazy. Good to be back.

Tim Ulbrich: Fresh off vacation, right? You’re primed and ready to go, talk about investing?

Tim Baker: Yeah. We spent a week at the Jersey shore, kind of close to my old stomping grounds. And good family vacation away from Baltimore and the city and do some good social distancing on the beach. And yeah, just feeling happy to be back but glad I got to get some quality time with the fam.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So we’re back at it here today, talking about how to invest your money beyond an employer-sponsored plan like a 401k or a 403b, which we’ve talked about many times before on the podcast. And before we jump into this discussion, Tim, I think it’s important that we highlight, as I know I hear you say often, that investing, albeit a very important part of the financial plan, it is just one part of the financial plan. So talk to us about why that is so important that look at it that way. And really, what are all of the different parts that you work with in terms of the financial plan with clients?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think one of the issues that I have in, you know, with other financial planners, financial advisors, is a lot of financial advisors will say, “Hey, I do financial planning and investment management.” And it kind of, it grinds my gears a little bit because I think those are like one and the same. Like the investment management is nested in financial planning in the majority of cases. But the reason it’s separated out I think is because a lot of advisors will say, “I do financial planning,” but it’s really just managing your investments. They’ll say, “Hey, Tim, you have half a million dollars, we’ll manage that for a fee or we’ll get commissions or things like that. And then maybe we’ll talk about some of these other things along the way like insurance, especially if I can sell you insurance or hey, the kids are going to college. You’re probably not going to get any help with your student loans or anything like that. So to me, you kind of follow the money. So with the way that most advisors are paid, it’s based on the investments and then if they can sell you kind of a crappy insurance product. So it has like this elevated designation of, you know, with regard to the financial plan. And it is important and it is a main driver. But I think, you know, getting your student loans right, having a savings plan, a plan for the debt, a plan to pay off your house, you’re properly protected from an insurance perspective so you’re managing your risk, estate plan, your taxes, which permeate everything, you’re doing some planning for that. Like to me, it’s just one piece of the puzzle. And I think we kind of put the investment up on a pedestal. And again, it’s important. It’s typically the thing that’s most confusing or most exciting to the average consumer because it’s kind of like this, oh, OK, I can buy shares of this and I can be investing in these companies. But I often argue that those are some times where the more exciting an investment is, typically the worse it is for the investor because they’re chasing returns or they’re tweaking too much. So you know, at YFP, we do all of the things and we fit the investment and retirement piece into that puzzle. But then we also kind of go beyond where we talk about things like credit, credit score, credit report, and you know, kind of the life events of hey, Tim, I’m buying a house, I’m buying a car. I’m getting married, so now I’m combining finances, we’re having a baby, we’re retiring in a couple years, we’re getting into real estate investing, we’re negotiating our salary, we’re downsizing. Whatever that is, to me, those are the main — kind of some of the main drivers. We have the structure that is the financial plan, but then we have these life events that happen that can throw a wrench and kind of force us to zig and zag. So again, the investment is super important, but at the end of the day, it’s going to be one piece of the overall financial journey.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’re going to keep coming back to this over and over again, that the financial plan and how you think through your financial decisions should be comprehensive, comprehensive, comprehensive. And so I think especially because we do so many episodes or blog posts or whatever that are more topical in nature. So here, we’re talking about investing. It might be student loans, it might be home buying. And I think it’s just human behavior that you hear something and you’re like, ooh, I can optimize that. Maybe after today, somebody’s like, ooh, I should go max out my Roth IRA. But you know, you take a step back and that may or may not be the best decision once you have a chance to look at all of the different components of the financial plan and understand how one decision can have a ripple effect into the others. So let’s jump in. I want to start by talking about the end, and that really is the nest egg. As we talk about long-term savings, trying to determine what we ultimately need to have saved so that we can turn that into a meaningful plan of what we should be doing today. So as you work with clients, Tim, on this long-term savings strategy, talk us through why that nest egg calculation is so important, what it is, and then how you ultimately are able to back that into a plan of something that they can take action on today.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, typically when I talk to some of our clients that are in maybe 20s, 30s or even 40s, you know, I’ll ask the question, I’m like, “Well, how are you feeling about your retirement?” And you know, sometimes the question is — sometimes, especially early on in the 20s and maybe even 30s, it’s kind of similar to the question that we would ask when we would ask students and residents, probably students at like the APhA conference, we would say like, “How are you feeling about your student loans?” And a lot of the answer was like, “Ah, I just don’t even really look at it. I’m not really worried about it. I’ll figure it out later.” And that kind of perpetuates into like the next, really one of the next big things is trying to establish retirements savings. So it’s like, ah, I don’t really know. So then if I ask the follow-up question — if I say something, if I get an answer like, “Well, I guess I feel good about it, I’m getting a match and maybe I’m putting a little money into like an IRA or something,” I’m like, “Well, do you feel like you’re on track?” And you know, I think that question then kind of goes into like, well, I don’t know. I’m not really sure. I think I want to retire at 65, but there’s some people that think they have to retire or that they’re going to work forever. So what the nest egg is is it’s an exercise that we do, it’s a calculation that we do, and I kind of walk it line-by-line through with the client that says, that shows them if they’re — basically, are they on track or off track? And it’s kind of a binary thing. So what I often say to a lot of clients is like I say, “Hey, you know, you probably need $4 or $5 million to retire.

Tim Ulbrich: What?

Tim Baker: And they typically — yeah — and then they typically look at me like I have 4 or 5 million heads, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.
Tim Baker: So I say, “Alright, once” — I’m processing that look — once we get beyond that and what we typically do is then is we start to break or deconstruct that number down to a monthly number that we can digest today. So big, big number, way in the future, Tim, that doesn’t mean anything to me. That’s just this noise. That doesn’t connect. That doesn’t connect with me today. So what we do is we then break it down to a number that they can sink their teeth in today. So I can say, “OK, if you need — if we had nothing saved for retirement and you’re getting the match and maybe you’re maxing out your Roth IRA, you’re still running a deficit of $100 per month. So we need to maybe put a little bit money into the 401k or something like that.” So what it does is it provides actionable steps, you know, for them to kind of get on track. And then as they kind of pursue, we kind of check in with that calculation as the years go by, and then as we get into the 40s and 50s and 60s and 70s, we do a little bit more robust planning and kind of decisions that are stuff like, OK, if we retire early or if we downsize our house or if we relocate to this state that’s maybe more tax-free, we can kind of show the effects of that and if your money’s going to run out or not and at what age. So longer story longer, the nest egg calculation is really meant to say, alright, we need some type of money in the future so you’re 30-, 20-, 20-, 30-, 35-year-older self can retire and really not have to work anymore or have the option not to work. So you know, to bring this full circle, the investment plan and the retirement plan that’s kind of executed per what the nest egg says is really, really, really important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and you know, we’ve mentioned before on the show that saving for the future, whether it’s traditional retirement or something else, it shouldn’t be I hope, I wish, I dream, maybe. I mean, it’s a set of assumptions based on mathematical calculations. And we may or may not like the outcome of that, but we can then begin to understand the variables that go into that calculation and make adjustments or changes, whether that be investments or changes in expectations or adjustments in changes on how we’re executing our savings plan. And so Tim, we talk a lot about wow, it’s really important to invest, invest, invest and do so at an early age and you’ve got to take advantage of compound interest and let it work its magic. But I think we often brush over, you know, what does that mean? And why is that so tangible? So give us the 20,000-foot view of exactly what is compound interest, why that’s so important, and then perhaps an example of how investing can really help someone grow their nest egg. So somebody who is and is not investing.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, we use this quote by Albert Einstein, and it says, “Compound interest is the eighth wonder of the world. He who understands it, earns it. He who doesn’t, pays it.” So a lot of pharmacists, especially early on in their career, they’re feeling it from the paying it side, right? Oh man, I’ve got $200,000 in debt, I’m paying 6.5-7% in interest, you know, this is terrible. But you know, once we kind of have a plan for the loans — and I’m not saying it needs to be paid off — but once we have an intentional plan for the loans and our consumer debt is in check, we have an emergency fund in place, we can then really start dipping our toe very seriously into the investment waters. So you know, so that’s really the idea is that we want the compound interest is our money, we’re taking risks to earn it. But we’re putting it out, we’re putting it into companies and to maybe bonds and we’re saying, “Alright, here’s some money. Hopefully we can earn dividends and capital appreciation as we go. And I can get a much better return down in, basically in the future.” So to give you kind of a case study — and the reason this is really important is, you know, if we talk about Ally Bank, a big one for a high yield savings vehicle, but as many people with where interest rates are, you’re making like 1%. And one of the main things that you’re combating as you’re building wealth is tax, so Uncle Sam always needs his bite of the apple, and inflation. So — and I think, Tim, you might have created this graph, but I showed the graph of the $10 latte. So you know, if you have a latte that costs $4 in 2020, using historical rates of inflation of about 3%, in 30 years, that latte will cost $10. So this is why my dad, who’s in his 70s, would say, “Well, Tim, back in my day, the nickel would buy the whole candy store.” And now it doesn’t buy anything because prices, the prices of goods and services go up naturally over time.

Tim Ulbrich: So just a quick aside, Tim, on that. It made me laugh when you said that. I just — the other day with my boys I had a box of Cherry Heads with like a $.25 sign on the corner of the box, and I was like, “When I was a kid, we used to go out to the candy store. And those were not $.25.” So.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I mean, my wife sent me a picture of I think she filled up at like $1.25 because she had some points or whatever. And I was kind of reminiscing, like I think it was either when I started driving or when my brother started driving, gas was at like $.89 or $.99 a gallon.

Tim Ulbrich: I remember that.

Tim Baker: You know? And you see it in the movies. And those are — that’s a staple of American life. That’s pretty kind of inflation-focused because people really get upset when gas goes up because it’s right in our face, but if you think about all these other, I mean — gosh, we could talk about college tuition and drive our listeners off a cliff here. But yeah, I mean, prices just go up. So to combat the taxman and the inflation monster, we have to — we can’t just put our money into the mattress and not take risks. We can’t just put our money into a bank account and not take risks because naturally, maybe that $500,000 that you have in your bank account, maybe it’ll some interest, but in 30 years, it’s going to purchase about half of what you can purchase today.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So if we take a case study here, so we’re going to talk about Conservative Jane. So Conservative Jane, she’s a pharmacist, she makes $120,000 in income, she gets her 3% cost of living raises, which might be generous. She gets that every year. She’s going to put 10% into her retirement plan, but she’s just going to put it into a Money Market, which is like a cash-like investment. And she’s going to work for 30 years. Over the course of that 30 years, she’s going to accumulate a nest egg of about $600,000. So you’re going to say, hey, that’s not too bad. But because hopefully a lot of our listeners are reading “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” we assert that — or at least you and Tim Church assert and I agree — that we need to be thinking like millionaires because it’s going to — that is what it will take for us to achieve that financial freedom, that financial independence that we’re looking for. So this Conservative Jane, she’s really afraid about what the market has done in the ‘08-’09 crisis, the subprime mortgage crisis if you remember that, the COVID crisis where the stock market did a nose dive here and now is recovering. And she’s saying, “You know what? I don’t want to look at my balance and see it go down. I just want to slow and steady.” So unfortunately, that amount of money is not really — if she retires at 65, it’s not going to last her until 95, 100, 105, which is typically what she’ll live to. So in an alternate reality, which again, another of maybe Einstein’s theories, we wave our wand and we say, OK, if we take a more aggressive stance with our investments and we take the exact same Conservative Jane with the same income, $120,000, the same cost of living raises, the same contribution amount, 10%, and the same timeline of career, 30-year, and the only thing that we do differently, the only variable that we change is we change the stance towards investment. So instead of being conservative, we’re being aggressive. And what the market bears consistently over 20+-year periods, it’s about a 10% return. And when we adjust that down for inflation, it’s about a 6.87% return. So this is where Aggressive Jane is now taking advantage of that compound interest, so those capital appreciation where you buy that stock at $100 and it sells for $500 in the future. Or the dividends that these companies will reward shareholders over time for being investors. So when we do that and we get that 7% return, it’s about a $1.2 million swing. So that nest egg is not going to be $600,000 now. With Aggressive Jane, it’s going to be $1.8 million. So and you’re not doing anything different except for your stance. So it’s going to be a rockier road, it’s going to be a bumpier road because you’re going to have ups and downs in the market, but if you believe that the market takes care of you over time like we do, it’s going to be OK. So to me, that is the power. And when we show that and we can demonstrate that in the nest egg calculation to say, hey, we’ll talk about risk here in a little bit. This is your risk tolerance, you’re showing this type of portfolio, but if we’re a little bit more aggressive, then they’re like, oh, well I don’t have to save as much right now or I’m actually set for where I’m at. I don’t have to work until I’m 85 years old. And I think demonstrating that, you kind of get that (sigh). And we’ve had clients that have looked at this and were like, alright, well, one spouse was maybe I don’t need to work anymore. We could have a single-income family because we want to stay home and raise the kids. That’s the power in it is to have some intentionality about what we’re doing and we’re not just like oh, I don’t really know how I’m tracking for retirement. And the sooner that you do it, you know, one of the big things that we say with working with a lot of young professionals is time is a great asset to have. We do believe that the income that pharmacists make is great. But time is a great asset to have, and it can kind of be a double-edged sword because some people are like, well, I have 20-30 years to figure that out. But the sooner that you figure it out, the better.

Tim Ulbrich: And I just love that example because as you had mentioned, one variable that was different, you know, where you put that money — so instead of a Money Market account, you’re investing that. We’ll talk about vehicles to do that here in a moment — the only variable that’s different. So you’ve already done the hard work. You’ve already said, “I’m going to save x% of my salary.” That example was 10%, perhaps those that are listening are aspiring for a higher number. But you’ve already made that hard decision. Now it’s a matter of where do I put that to be able to put myself in the best advantage and best position to achieve my long-term goals. So we’ve talked about the concept of what you need in the nest egg. We’ve talked about why investing and compound interest is so important. So the next natural question is, well, how do you get there? Where do I put my money? What are the options that I have available? And this episode is all about investing beyond the 401k and 403b. So we’re not going to talk about those two, and we’ll link to our investing series back from episodes 072-076 where we have more information on those. So let’s jump into those other investment vehicles beyond the 401k or 403b, Tim. And here we’re going to be talking about traditional IRAs, Roth IRAs, HSAs, SEP IRAs and taxable brokerage accounts. So we’re going to do this in a rapid-fire format. So Tim, we’ll tee up each one one-by-one, we’ll start with the IRA. And I’d love for you to talk about, you know, generally, characteristics and design, contribution limits and perhaps some advantages and disadvantages with each of these options. So let’s start off with the IRA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the traditional IRA or just sometimes called an IRA, this is an investment vehicle, I like to say investment bucket, that you can use as an investor often to supplement your 401k, 403b. So with this particular bucket, it is a bucket that you fill with pre-tax dollars. So anybody can contribute — anybody that has earned income can contribute to a traditional IRA. Now, once you start making more money than say like a resident makes, if you’re a normally salaried pharmacist, you don’t get that deduction but you can still put non-deductible contributions into your IRA, which you don’t get that tax benefit. And then any money — and this goes for any of these vehicles that we’re talking about — any money that’s inside of that bucket grows tax-free. So if you get investment income or if you get dividends paid, you’re not taxed on that. So outside of that, in the taxable account, you are taxed on that. And I’ll talk about that when we get there. So typically the contributions that you can make into these accounts are $6,000. So that’s in aggregate with the Roth IRA, which we’ll talk about here in a second, next. So if you put $4,000 into a traditional IRA, you can only put $2,000 into a Roth. So it’s in aggregate. But it’s completely separate from your 401k, 403, TSP. So these aren’t tied together in terms of contribution amount. Once you reach age 50 or older, you can put an extra $1,000. And like I said, this is subject to phase out for the deduction. So the IRS will look at your AGI and say, “Hey, Tim, you make too much money. You can put money in here, but you’re not getting that deduction.” So the appropriate use here is that you’re supplementing a 401k or you have no retirement savings, so again, we work with a lot of independent pharmacists that don’t provide a 401k to their employers. So call me if that’s the case, we can definitely help there. But in the meantime, you can use this as really your main retirement. And then in that case, you do get a full deduction, no matter what you make. You want to shelter your income from tax, so if you are trying to lower your AGI and you can, if you’re in the right tax bracket, so you’re a resident, that’s the way to do it, you’re deferring taxes on your investment portfolio. So it’s not taxed going in, but it is going to be taxed coming out when you distribute it in retirement. And then this is for long-term accumulation for retirement. So you’re not going to put money in here and then use it for a home purchase or something like that. So the biggest advantages here is, again, it’s a tax benefit, the investing selection is nice. So you can typically — I always talk about with the 401k, you kind of have to play with the toys in the sandbox, so you only get 20-30 selection. Here, you can basically invest in anything you want.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And typically, less fees associated with it. Now the big drawback is if you do take money out, it’s a 10% penalty unless you’re 59.5. You can take loans against it, which I think is actually a benefit. And then the distributions when you’re retired are taxed as ordinary income, which is not great. So hopefully — I don’t know if that was quick enough, Tim, but those are the high level pieces.

Tim Ulbrich: No, that’s great. So there we were talking about traditional IRA. Let’s talk for a couple moments then about the Roth IRA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so Roth IRA, a lot of the same things are true. The main difference here is that this is — you’re contributing it to a Roth IRA with after-tax monies, which means that you don’t get a deduction going in, so you pay the tax up front, it grows tax-free, and then when you distribute it in retirement, it comes out tax-free. So one of the things I’ll talk about is like I say, “OK, Tim Ulbrich, you have $1 million in your Roth IRA and $1 million in your traditional IRA. How much money do you have?” Unfortunately, your balance sheet says $2 million, but that’s not what you actually own because in the traditional IRA, Uncle Sam hasn’t taken his bite of the apple. So if you’re in a 25% tax bracket, in the traditional IRA, you own $750,000 of that and the government owns $250,000 of that as it’s distributed. So that’s kind of a high-level look at that. So you can convert a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA, and that’s kind of a separate ball of wax, but you can contribute up to $6,000, there’s a catch-up phase, again, this is typically to supplement the 401k. You’re looking for long-term retirement. You can use this money for like a first-time home purchase, you can distribute up to $10,000 without a 10% penalty. So there are some little nuances to — you don’t have loans or anything like that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: And typically the investment selection is good. There’s less fees associated in most cases compared to like a 401k. And your distributions of basis, which is the money that you put in, are always tax- and penalty-free. Now the earnings that it makes could be taxed and could be penalized based on the situation, so that’s something to keep in mind. So high level between traditional pre-tax, not taxed going in, grows tax-free, tax comes out when you distribute it. For a Roth, it’s taxed going in, it grows tax-free, and then it’s not taxed coming out. So I usually take clients through some pretty cool graphics that show them that because it’s harder — oh, and the big thing I forgot to say — this is important — is that for a Roth, for a traditional IRA, anybody can contribute to a traditional IRA, maybe not get the deductions. For a Roth, once you start making a certain amount of money, the door starts to slam shut for you to actually make contributions. So as a single earner in 2020, once you start making more than $124,000, that Roth IRA door starts to shut. So then that’s typically where we do a nondeductible contribution to an IRA and then do a backdoor contribution to a Roth IRA.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and since you mentioned that, Tim, and I’m glad you did, the backdoor, I would point our listeners to Episode 096. We talked about how to do a backdoor Roth IRA. And we also have a blog post on why every pharmacist should consider that as an option with their investing plan. We’ll link to both of those in the show notes. So that’s the IRA and the Roth IRA. Next up is the Health Savings Account, the HSA, also known as the Stealth IRA. Talk to us about that one.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So this is typically paired with a high deductible health plan. So a high deductible health plan is a health plan that you’re — for an individual, the minimum annual deductible is $1,400 a year or more. And the max out-of-pocket expense is $6,900 a year more. So if you have the option with your employer, you’re young, you’re healthy — I guess you can be older and healthy — but if you’re healthy, you don’t go to the doctor a lot, this might be a thing to look at. And you can couple the HSA with this. So this is — the HSA is different from an FSA. FSA is a use-or-lose fund. So every year, you’re going to say, “OK, if I put $1,000 into this and I don’t use it, then I lose it.” And it doesn’t accumulate over time, so at the end of the year, you’re buying a bunch of stuff for like contacts and things like that. I don’t like playing that game. Whereas the HSA, it does accumulate over time. So you don’t have to use it. So the money goes in cash and then for some HSAs, you can invest it dollar one or maybe you have to wait for you to have a balance of $1,000 and then you can invest above $1,000. It just depends on the HSA. But it allows you — it’s very similar to an IRA in a sense of how you invest it. Now, the main thing for this, it has a triple tax benefit. So what I mean by that is for the IRAs, we were talking about a double tax benefit. You either get a tax break going in or going out. And it grows tax-free. With the HSA, there’s a triple tax benefit, meaning that you get a deduction — and it doesn’t matter how much money you make. So you could make $10 million a year, and you’d still get this deduction. You get a deduction as it goes in, it grows tax-free, and then it comes out tax-free if it’s used for qualifying medical expenses or once you reach age 65, you can use it for really whatever you want. So for a lot of people, they use this is as almost like another IRA bucket, which is what my household uses it for to get that. So it never sees the IRS. It never sees the taxman, if you do it correctly. So you can put up to $3,550 as an individual, $7,100 as a family, and then there’s a catchup after age 55, I believe. So you know, the advantages, the advantages of this is obviously the tax treatment, it’s another bucket that if you’re a little bit higher income that you don’t get some of the tax breaks like the traditional IRA deduction, you can put money in there. So what we try to do as a family is we fund this first and then we try to cash flow our health expenses as best we can.

Tim Ulbrich: So that’s the traditional IRA, Roth IRA, HSA. Talk to us about us about the SEP IRA.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the SEP IRA out there is typically for those self-employed pharmacists out there or maybe ones that are running a side business or could be they work for a small business owner that has a SEP IRA as their sole retirement plan. So they look and act very similar to a traditional IRA, but they’re kind of like a super IRA because the contribution limits are a lot higher. So this is an employer-sponsored IRA, so if you work for a company that has a SEP, you don’t put any money into it at all, and you can’t put any money into it at all. The employer basically has to put — and they’re not necessarily as popular once you start getting employees just because there’s flexibility on when, you know, so you don’t have to contribute to it every year. So if you have a down year because of COVID or whatever, the business owner could say, “Hey, I don’t want to contribute this year.” But next year when business starts to pick up, you have to contribute at the same rate as you contribute to yourself. So if I put 10% in for what I make, you have to do the same for your employees. So typically the rules here, eligible employees have to be at least 21, they have to work for the employer at least three out of the last five years, they have to earn at least $600. So if you’re the employee and the owner, so if you’re one and the same person, this is kind of what I used early on in my business, a SEP, to basically save for retirement above and beyond the traditional IRA. So you can typically put in like the lesser of 25% or up to $57,000 as of 2020. So the hard part about this — and one of the disadvantages — it’s really hard because you’re really looking at what the business profits are to kind of gauge what you can put in. So in my experience, I would put money aside and then like on tax day when I had all those numbers, then that’s when I would kind of check the SEP IRA. So long story short, the IRA is just typically used for those self-employed, if you’re running a side business, you might be able to shelter a little bit of the business income there to help from a tax perspective, from a Schedule C perspective. But there’s no Roth component or anything like that. So there are some disadvantages.

Tim Ulbrich: So we have lots of tax advantage savings vehicles. So obviously the 401k or the 403b, traditional IRA, Roth IRA, HSA, SEP IRA, so as we talk for a moment about taxable brokerage accounts, not only what are they but what would their role be, considering that we have all of these other options available?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the taxable account — and we can kind of talk about this in kind of the mistakes that I see — but the taxable account is often — think of it as like a savings account but on steroids. So instead of in the savings account that money just sits in cash and maybe earns an interest rate, in a taxable account, you can actually convert that cash into shares of an investment, you know, Facebook stock or S&P 500 ETF or a mutual fund, and then that’s where you start earning the capital appreciation, the dividends, etc. So the contributions here, it’s really unlimited. So you know, you can put a couple bucks a year into it or millions of dollars a year. It’s really — the world’s your oyster. Same thing with the investments: You can basically invest in whatever you want. There’s restrictions like you see in some of the retirement plans. You typically use this when you’ve exhausted your retirement contributions to some of these other accounts that we’ve talked about or if you say, “Hey, Tim, I want to retire at age 55,” a lot of these accounts, the IRA, the 401k, they’re going to say, “Hey, you’re going to be penalized to take money out until you reach this kind of arbitrary age of 59.5 years old. So if I retire at 55, I can’t get that money out of the 401k without a penalty. So when you might use this account for like near — like kind of the beginning phases of retirement and then shift — when you get to age 60, shift over. The other use for this is my wife and I use this for a future car purchase is we see where rates are and how the saver is taking a beating now because interest rates are so low. So we say, alright, we can use this taxable account, we’ll put a car payment worth every month into a taxable account and hopefully over the next five years, the average investment return in the S&P 500 is about 6-7%. Hopefully we can get that versus the 1% that we’re getting in our high-yield savings account. So it’s more of a near- to medium-term goal, which could be a home purchase, a car purchase, maybe real estate investing, investment, with the caveat that you could lose that investment. So you know, there’s risk there that you’re taking. So big advantages in terms of flexibility, there’s no penalty to withdraw, you can recognize losses to offset gains. So this is where you’re paying capital gains, whether they’re short-term or long-term. So when you buy that share at $100 and sell it for $400 in a taxable account, you’re paying $300 in capital gains per share. And so that is one of the disadvantages to the taxable account.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, we started by talking about the nest egg, what you need, and then we talked about the importance of investing and taking advantage of compound interest to get there, and then we talked about the vehicles that are available to get there, lots of different ones. So then the next question is, OK, well how do I prioritize this? I’ve got some dollars that I want to save each and every month towards my long-term savings goals to get to that nest egg and take advantage of compound interest. But with all of these options available, where do I go and in what order? And so this takes me back to Episode 073, where we talked about the priority of investing and we talked about the order in which we think you should consider filling your long-term savings or retirement buckets. And it’s important to say, as with any other part of the financial plan, this has to be tailored to the individual. So of course, this is not investment advice. But walk us through again, Tim, at a high level what we think of as the priority of investing between these different vehicles that are available to someone.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so assuming that we have kind of the foundation in place, the consumer debt is kind of taken care of, emergency fund, we don’t owe any taxes, we have a plan for the student loans, we’re kind of accounting for more of the near-term goals like travel, wedding, home purchase, education planning for the kids, really as we kind of wade into the how you prioritize, it’s going to depend. Obviously that’s my statement answer, but in most cases what we would say is you want to start with the employer match. That is — we talk about that’s free money in 99% of cases. 95% of cases, you always want to get, at least get the match so you don’t forego that benefit. And then typically, the next step, the decision tree here is based on if my — how great or not so great my retirement plan is. So you know, in a lot of cases, retirement plans, 401k’s, 403b’s, they have a lot of fees associated that the investor doesn’t necessarily see. So what we typically say is that if you don’t know, it might be good to go out into the IRA/HSA world and max those out next. And then go back into the 401k, the 403b, the TSP and get the max, which is in 2020 $19,500. And then from there, from a traditional investment perspective, that’s when you would start loading up in the taxable account or if you’re more nontraditional, you might look at real estate investment, investing in businesses, or something like that. So that’s typically kind of steps 1, 2, 3 and then 4 with regard to how to kind of prioritize your approach to filling your retirement buckets.

Tim Ulbrich: And you talked about one of these already, but common mistakes that you see people make in the investment prioritization, but talk us through some others that you commonly see as well as people are trying to sort out these different options.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, often when I come across — and I had a conversation with a pharmacist here recently. You know, they get into investing before the debt is paid or there’s a plan for the debt. So that could be a student loan, that could be a credit card or a personal loan. So you know, you have $10,000 in credit card debt, but you’re putting 10% in — you get a 5% and you get a 10%, and you have a 10% contribution into your — you know, that doesn’t really make any sense. Or sometimes there’s no purpose or goal with the investment. So most of these accounts that we’ve talked about are retirement accounts, so they’re for retirement. But if you have taxable accounts, I often ask clients that have like a Robinhood account or — what’s the other one? Robinhood and…

Tim Ulbrich: Acorn?

Tim Baker: Acorn. And I’m like, what’s this account for? And they’re like, I don’t know. And to me, I think that’s dangerous — not dangerous, but just to me, I’d like to say, “OK, my wife and I, we have a taxable account, which is like Robinhood in terms of the same tax treatment. But it’s for real estate, it’s for a trip to Australia.” And sometimes we do the taxable accounts before we even get the match, we have an emergency fund in place. And I know why that happens. It happens — and I think you, Tim, and I can appreciate this — is because you’re interested, you’re curious, you want to see how some of these apps or like the investment works. And it feels good to invest in Tesla or Disney or Ford or whatever. But it’s kind of putting the cart before the horse. So in a lot of cases, we kind of advise clients, like, hey, you need a $30,000 emergency fund. Right now, you have $10,000. You have $30,000 in the taxable account. Let’s do the math here and figure that out. Another mistake is just having no concept — I know we’re not talking about it today — but no concept of how good or bad their 401k and 403b is, which that’s tough because it is very opaque to the investor, unfortunately. And then probably the last thing is just kind of having that 401k inertia where they just stick it at the match and then they wake up and they’re 45 and they’re still just putting it at 3% or 5%. So some of that investment, some of the mistakes I see with kind of the prioritization is kind of outlined there.

Tim Ulbrich: And you mentioned, Tim, earlier I think an important part about risk tolerance and understanding how that fits into your investment selection, your long-term goals. So how do you work through this with clients in terms of understanding the risk tolerance and then ultimately developing a portfolio that aligns with that.

Tim Baker: I kind of look at risk tolerance as — so you really have two things going on here. You have the risk tolerance, and then you have what’s called risk capacity. So risk tolerance is the amount of risk that you want to take. So in the case study that we went through earlier in this episode, we talked about Conservative Jane. So Conservative Jane didn’t want to take any risk at all, didn’t want to. The risk capacity is the amount of risk that you need to take or the amount of risk that you can take. So for some people, you know, if they’re age 50, they want to retire at age 60-65 and they haven’t done the things that they need to do throughout the course of their career and they’re a little bit behind, you need to take a little bit more risk to kind of make up for lost time. The other example is if you’re 30 years old and you’re going to retire at 65, you have 35 years, so you can take more risk because you just have a longer time horizon. So we measure the risk tolerance but then we talk about the risk capacity. And what I kind of say is — and I would say it’s not very common, but kind of the rules of thumb out there where you say, alright, you take your age and you sub — so say I’m 30 years old and I subtract that from 100, that’s 70. So the rule of thumb is you put 70% in equities and 30% in bonds. And I think that is utterly terrible. That’s a terrible rule of thumb. And I love those rules of thumbs and making it easier. But it’s — I think it’s the wrong advice. So to me, what I argue is if you have decades worth of time, 20-30 years, you really shouldn’t have many bonds in your portfolio at all, if any. So as an example, I’m — how old am I? — I’m going to be 38 this year, Tim.

Tim Ulbrich: Old. Old.

Tim Baker: Yeah. I’m getting up there. But I’m not going to smell bonds in my portfolio for another 20 years probably because, you know, right? And it sounds weird, but like when COVID happened and the market went down, like I never looked at my balances. I don’t care. And the reason I don’t care is because I’m not going to spend that money for another 25 years, 30 years. So in 25 or 30 years, we’ll probably remember COVID, but we’re not going to remember what our balances were there. So now if you’re 60 and you’re going to retire next year or in a couple years, then you do care. And that’s where we start shifting from an equity portfolio to more of a bond portfolio where it’s more safety in principle and you’re protecting what you’ve built over the course of your career. So that’s important. And that’s, again, something that when we talk about, when we change that one variable between Conservative Jane and Aggressive Jane, if you’re willing to kind of join me on that ride — and it can be bumpy — but the market goes up, then you just have to save less hard, if that makes sense. Because your money’s just going to go a lot further, and a lot of people get that wrong.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I remember when Jess and I were working through this with you, Tim, I remember taking an assessment that we each did that helped us understand our own risk tolerance but then also stimulated a great discussion between the three of us about OK, let’s take that information and then let’s also look at that in the context of our nest egg and our goals and everything else that we want to do. And I think that’s exactly how this process should work. So I want to talk about taxes for a moment. And we talk often because we so firmly believe that tax strategy and planning is ideal when it’s paired up with the financial planning in the process. So we are fortunate to have Paul Eichenberg, our IRS-enrolled agent, on the YFP Planning team to help our clients that are also working with our Certified Financial Planners. But as we look at the tax piece here in the context of investing — and we’ve talked a little bit about it already — but paint that picture for us. Why is the tax consideration and having that input so valuable as we are looking at it through the lens of the investments?

Tim Baker: Yeah, you know, just coming from the beach, it’s like tax is like the sand. Like it gets into everything, right? So it’s everywhere.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s good.

Tim Baker: And you have to consider that. And I’ll give you — I’ll kind of give you a real-world example. I was having a meeting with a client we’ve been working with forever and we were talking about his Roth IRA and some of the other things. And we’re not doing his taxes right now. I think he has a family member that does it. And I said, “Hey, let’s at least upload your tax returns so we can kind of take a look and see how everything’s doing and see if I can give you some advice.” And we found out that his AGI, it was actually too high for him to be making Roth contributions. So we’re going to have to basically back those contributions out, you know, put them into as a nondeductible contribution in the traditional IRA and then figure out a way to convert them. So you know, it’s going to cost him. There’s going to be a penalty and things like that. And it’s just one of the — this was the year that he kind of went over that threshold. He was working a lot of overtime, etc. So you know, so those types of things happen. But what I say to clients is like, look, most financial planners, they don’t do taxes. So in my last firm, we would say, “Hey, client, we don’t do taxes. But you know, go work with a CPA,” and then there was really no cross-planning between the two of us. And I think you leave a lot on the table when you do that or you potentially can run into some of the cases like I was telling here today. So my big pitch to the client that I just mentioned was like, hey, let’s just roll it up in with us. Let’s do it. Fire your aunt or whoever that’s doing it and let us do it because it’s just — it’s that important. So I think whether it’s something like the Roth contribution or just when to convert things, it’s just for everything, every financial decision that is involved typically has some type of tax implications. And what I’ve found, at least in my experience, is that similar to like the student loans, most financial planners don’t really understand student loans, most financial planners are not going to basically file the taxes and do the associated planning that is kind of need through every walk of life with regard to the financial plan. So that’s why we’ve kind of rolled that up into our service. And I think it just makes it — it allows us to have more robust conversations and cover more bases with regard to the journey that we’re on.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff, Tim. And we preach and hopefully model with our clients the importance of both the filing aspects as well as the strategy and the planning. And so our clients have the opportunity to work closely not only with you and Robert and the rest of the team but also with Paul to be able to make sure that that tax piece is closely integrated with the rest of the financial plan. So as we wrap up here, Tim, with everything that we have talked through here as it relates to investing, and from my experience, there is huge value for having a financial coach. And we know that investing is a huge part of the financial plan, as we started with. It’s only one part. And like we talked about, it’s essential for helping folks, me and others, increase their nest egg and ultimately achieve their long-term financial goals. And I know firsthand from my experience for Jess and I having you on our side as our coach to guide us through our options and help us assess our risk tolerance and ultimately put together that savings plan has been so critical. So for those that are listening that say, “Hey, I want a coach in my corner. I want somebody to help me guide me through not only the investing part of the financial plan but the rest of the plan and the ins and outs of each part of the plan,” talk to us more about not only where do folks go to ultimately have a conversation with you but also the offering and the service of what we do at YFP Planning.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the best way to — if someone’s listening to this and they’re like, hey, that sounds really something that I need in my life, they can go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com and at the top right, there’s a “Book Free Financial Planning Call.” And you’ll see an appointment calendar where you’ll see my ugly mug and then also you, Tim Ulbrich, that we can have conversations about potentially working together. Or I think if you go to YFPPlanning.com is our other website, you can book a meeting that way. And those are free of charge. It’s really hey, this is us, who are you, let’s learn more about it and see if we would be potentially a good fit. You know, I think when — the way that I look at financial planning is I don’t really even look at it as like financial planning. I really look at our service as a life plan that is supported by a financial plan. So I often say, you know, we were talking about that nest egg as like, hey, you need $4 or $5 million in your nest egg, you know, let’s suppose that we work together for the next 20 or 30 years and we have $10 million in the nest egg. $10 million is better than $4 or $5 million. However, if you’re miserable because you haven’t done the things that you wanted to do in life, you feel like you don’t get fulfillment from your career, you haven’t traveled, whatever those goals are, whatever — we talk about the why — whatever that why is, who cares? Like what’s the point? What’s the point of making a six-figure income, what’s the point of becoming a Seven Figure Pharmacist, what’s the point of paying — like what’s the point if you’re not happy, if you’re not fulfilled? So to me, the hard part — so we’ve kind of gotten into some of the technical pieces today with regard to investing outside of the 401k, but to me the hard part about this is the human element.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: It’s the how do we thread the needle between taking care of you, the listener that’s listening out there today, but then you the listener who’s 10, 20, 30 years older that things are completely different. So it’s threading the needle between taking care of yourself today and your future self. And that is hard, especially if you’re doing it with a partner, working with you and Jess, my wife, I mean, you just have different opinions about money and there’s compromise and things like that. So to me, we go into lots of different pieces of the financial plan and we kind of rattle off a bunch of them, but at the end of the day what we want to see — our mantra really is are we helping the client grow and protect income, which is the lifeblood of the financial plan? Without the income, nothing moves. So sometimes we kind of like poo-poo the six-figure income, that’s going to solve all your problems. It is good to have, but we want to be intentional. So how can we help you grow and protect the income, and then more importantly, grow and protect the net worth, which means increasing the assets efficiently, which includes the investments, but then also decreasing the liabilities efficiently, which includes things like student loans, paying off the house, etc. So assets minus your liabilities equal your net worth. So income and net worth quantitatively are the two most important numbers. And we track the net worth over time to show progress. But then it goes back to the who cares unless we’re keeping the goals in mind. And those are the qualitative aspect that we really have to pair. So you know, it’s not uncommon for me to say, hey client, we talked about this trip to Australia. We’ve been working together for 12, 18, 2 years, whatever that 12-18 months, maybe two years — and again, keep COVID in mind — but I’ll say, “Where’s the money? We haven’t done that yet, but where’s the money for that?” Either it’s important and we want to be intentionally saving towards that goal and check that off because when I asked you the questions of like hey, what are we trying to do? You said hey, that’s something that came to mind. So it must be important. Or maybe it’s not anymore. And then we’ll adjust the plan accordingly. So how can we help you grow and protect income, the net worth, while keeping your goals in mind? That’s our jam.

Tim Ulbrich: I love it. And again, YFPPlanning.com, you can book a free discovery call to see if it’s a good fit for you, good fit for us. And if we’re not already yet a part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group and our community of more than 6,000 pharmacy professionals that are answering questions, encouraging one another, challenging one another, I hope you will join us in that community. And as always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your show each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

 

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 146: COVID-19: Financial Considerations


COVID-19: Financial Considerations

Things are changing on a daily basis secondary to COVID-19. In these unprecedented times, there are a lot of financial concerns people are likely having. On this episode sponsored by APhA, Tim Baker, CFP® answers questions about investing, the uncertainty of work and student loans.

Summary

This podcast is from the APhA and YFP webinar recorded on March 31, 2020. In the past couple of weeks, so much has changed as a result of COVID-19. Between the stock market being down, unemployment rising, the CARES Act and rapid changes with federal student loans, it’s likely that you have a lot of questions regarding your finances.

During this discussion, Tim Baker, CFP® answers the questions everyone has at the top of their mind and focuses on the topics of investments, uncertainty of work and student loans. He also dives into the CARES Act and the levers you can pull if you’re facing financial hardship due to unemployment or a reduction in hours.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Well, good evening and welcome to this webinar. My name is Tim Ulbrich from the team over at Your Financial Pharmacist, and I’m excited to also have joining me my partner in crime and Certified Financial Planner Tim Baker as we’re going to talk about a big-time topic right now, which is financial considerations and COVID-19. So thank you so much for taking time out of your schedule to be here tonight. Thank you for those that during the registration process, you submitted questions and concerns that you have. That really helped us shape how we’ll spend our time this evening. And we’re also going to have time to take your questions throughout the evening as well. So thank you again. And first and foremost, before we jump in to individual topics, I know many listening or perhaps those that couldn’t be here tonight that will watch the replay are on the frontlines of this, putting themselves at risk and obviously stress that comes along with that and carrying that risk back home. So thank you so much for the work that you’re doing for the patients that you’re serving. And we certainly appreciate that effort.

So so many financial issues that are swirling around a time like this. And we’re going to try to hit some of the major ones, certainly not all of them knowing there’s so much changing so quickly, literally some days it seems like by the hour. At least by the day, we have some piece of news that’s coming out as it relates to COVID-19 and something related to the financial plan. If we look at just the past couple weeks as an example, we’ve seen the markets really take a significant hit. As of this morning, the Dow Jones was down roughly 25% from its February peak. And we actually saw that was inching closer to 40% last week before we saw an increase at the end of last week. Unemployment rate predictions are upwards of 30%. We certainly hope that many pharmacists aren’t going to be in that figure, but we’ve already seen a significant rise in unemployment claims in this area. We saw news of the fed cutting interest rates. And in one week, we had three pieces of big news related to student loans. First, the announcement from the Trump administration that we would be freezing interest rates on student loans for 60 days. Then, the announcement that there would be a pause of payments due for a 60-day period. And then of course, with the stimulus package that was passed last Friday, ultimately as we’ll talk about in more detail tonight, six-month window on most federal loans in terms of pausing the payments as well as interest accrual during that time. So certainly big news here in the last couple weeks as it relates to student loans.

So lots of things to talk about, and a brief introduction to the format. Then we’ll jump right in, and I’m going to put Tim Baker on the hot seat and start firing away your questions as we talk about really three big buckets of topics that we saw come through as themes when you all registered for this webinar this evening. One was around investments, you know, what do I do in terms of my investments during an uncertain time period such as this? How does my investing strategy change? So we’ll talk about that in detail. The second around the uncertainty of work and what this time period means in terms of employment and changes and we know some of you may be dealing with this more for others. And how does that impact the financial plan? And what could you be doing during this time of uncertainty? And then last of course would be student loans. And as I mentioned earlier, there’s a lot, a lot to talk about here. So in terms of the format, what we’re going to do is I have gathered some questions in advance, and I’m going to fire away at Tim Baker in each one of these three areas: investments, work uncertainty, and student loans. And then we’ll pause at the end of each of those sections to answer some of your questions. We may not get to all of them, but we’ll try to get to as many as we possibly can this evening. So if you have a question as you’re hearing some of the discussion this evening, please go ahead and submit that in the chat, and then I’m going to ask Drew from APhA, who’s on the call this evening, to help us field those questions and we’ll take a couple breaks throughout.

I do want to thank before we get started as well the American Pharmacists Association for the continued partnership that we have with Your Financial Pharmacist to provide financial education resources that are exclusive to APhA members. So this is one example, but we’ve been doing webinars often and live events. We have discounts on our products and services, including comprehensive financial planning, which you can learn more about at YFPPlanning.com. So to check out a lot of the resources that we’ve done with APhA, you can go to pharmacists.com/YFP and get more information about that partnership and even go back and watch some of the webinars that we’ve done over the past couple years.

Alright, Tim Baker, officially welcome. That was a long introduction, but welcome.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I know this is a chaotic time, so thank you for taking time out of your schedule to do this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, of course. Happy to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: So we know that many of your clients at Your Financial Pharmacist certainly are having a lot of questions. So many of these you probably already have gotten, but we’re going to go through, as I mentioned, each of these in more detail in three different buckets. So let’s start with investments. And I think probably the most common question that we’re seeing in a time period such as this, which is really similar — while the situation is different — similar market drops to what we saw in 2008 is what should I be doing as I think about my account being down? So the question here is my accounts are down 25% — so assuming your retirement accounts — from mid-February. How should my investing strategy change during this uncertain time where it appears there’s no end in sight to this pandemic and the havoc that it’s wreaking? So talk to us about investment strategy broadly during a time period like this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so — again, if people have heard me answer these questions, I’m going to start off with the worst answer ever. It’s going to depend. So a lot of our listeners are 20-something, 30-something, 40-something year-olds. And if your portfolio goes down now and you’re planning to retire when you’re 50, 60, 70, it doesn’t matter that much. Now, I don’t want to be facetious in saying that because it’s still painful when you look at hey, I had $200,000 in my portfolio and now I have $160,000 or something to that effect. That’s never fun, and we as human, those losses that we feel, the loss aversion really takes hold of us and it’s not fun. But the fact of the matter is that in most cases, these types of corrections, which last time was a subprime mortgage crisis that was created by kind of poor lending practices, this is a pandemic. I thought we were going to have kind of a downturn in the market due to an election. But this is kind of something that’s come out of nowhere, in essence, that’s really affected the market. And typically, these types of things, they last in the long run three years, three and a half years. So again, if you’re — I’m 37. I’ll use my example. If I’m going to work until I’m 67, that’s 30 years. I’m probably not going to even remember this unless I think about all of the Netflix I watched or the Zoom conferences that I had with my family, the games that we played. So now, the equation is a little bit different if you are kind of further along and closer to retirement. So probably some of the worst years to take a recession or to take a hit in your portfolio is right as you’re about to retire. So you know, 2, 3, 4, 5 years out. And the reason for that is when you start withdrawing on your portfolio in retirement, now you’re taking principal out, and you have to make up those gains that much more. So going through the eye of the storm in retirement is kind of like the couple years out to a couple years into retirement, which is when you probably want to be the most conservative. So depending on what side of the coin you’re on, that’s going to be a big part of it. Now, I was talking with a counterpart that said, hey, a bunch of his clients are reaching out and they’re like, how am I doing? And most of his clients are OK because he’s built out basically a bond ladder to get them through recession-like downturns in the market. So they’re basically priming that and maybe a little bit too much for this particular talk, but it really depends on where you’re at. So I would say as a general principle, a general rule of thumb with investments, you typically want to do the opposite of how you feel. So you know, when the subprime mortgage crisis was going on or right before the subprime mortgage crisis, people were taking out money from everywhere to buy real estate. When the dot-com crisis happened, right at the peak of that, people were taking out second mortgages on their house to buy cats.com. So in that case, we know that the markets probably inflated, and we want to be a little bit more conservative. I’m not saying do anything vastly different, but in the downturn, you know, when we see that slight, that drawdown, we typically want to take our investment ball and go home. So that’s what I tell my clients is that you don’t want to take your investment ball and go home. You actually want to do the opposite. You want to keep playing. If you can, you want to play some more, which means that if you are in a good cash position, get money to the market. Now, I often — and I said this last time we talked about this — sometimes I think financial advisors or we as humans, we rationalize away the loss and we’ll say, oh, it’s a great time to buy. It is kind of because when Trump was elected last time, I’m like, oh, the market, it’s overpriced, we’re going to see a correction, not a great time to buy. And that’s kind of the levels we’re at now. So it’s relative, right? But to me, the rule of thumb here is typically the more that you do, the worse. The more tinkering, the more you try to like outfool, outplay the market, it’s not going to work. You know, best rule of thumb is if you’re kind of in this situation where you’re in this accumulation phase, if you can invest more, invest more. If you can be a little bit more aggressive, be a little bit more aggressive. I often say that if you’re kind of in your 20s, 30s and 40s, you probably shouldn’t have any bonds in your portfolio at all. That’s my belief just because basically they’re a drag on your investments. When you get closer to retirement and there’s more safety in principal, then you want to put bonds in there and start really building out kind of that retirement paycheck, that bond ladder. So lots of words, lot of different ways to look at that. At the end of the day, this too shall pass. Markets will go up, it’s part of the general cycle of things. We’re basically being forced into this one a little bit more because of the pandemic, but we were also on an 11-year bull market, a positive market, really since the last downturn. So yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff. And Tim, this really has been a reminder for me in a couple areas. It’s something we preach and teach, but when it hits you directly, it’s a gut check to say, do I really believe in what I preach and teach? And you know, we talk about volatility and the irrationality of the markets and who can predict it, what a great example this has been. I mean, nobody can say they — now, some people might say I saw a bubble and it was eventually going to pop, yadda yadda yadda ya, but nobody predicted COVID-19 specifically. Maybe Bill Gates. But nobody predicted the impact that that would have at this time period and obviously the unemployment, all the impacts we’ve had. But also I think it’s just been a good reminder of some of the investing principles and strategies that I know I’m highly leveraged in stocks, you see a significant drop, I log into my accounts, I want to take action. I know I shouldn’t take action, so for me, this has also been a really good reminder of the value of having a coach in your corner, on your team, in a time period like this to really help you take a step back and look at the whole plan and to really go back and think, what’s the goal? What are we trying to do? What’s the timeline? And a period like this quickly becomes very emotional, not objective, and I think having somebody else that can really help you navigate a difficult time like this is a great reminder.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and my overall belief — I have a few of them — but my overall belief for investments is that investments should be as boring and budgeting. It should be as boring as paying off the debt. It should not be sexy, it shouldn’t be exciting. I think oftentimes when we make it that, that’s where we get into trouble because we’re typically going into investments that maybe cost too much. So when you think about like, oh, this is a smart beta fund, it’s going to cost the investor a lot of money. You know, even I am like, oh man, maybe I should buy this stock because it’s trading really low. And the example I gave the last time we talked about this is you know, when we had corrections in the ‘80s and ‘90s, my first employer out of the Army was Sears. Sears was this giant company that was never going to go away, it was retail supreme, kind of like the Amazon of today. It’s trading at like $.31 a share right now because they just were — so everyone thinks well maybe Amazon — I don’t think Amazon shares are down — but maybe that other, that Walmart or that other stock. So you start twisting your mustache to say hey, maybe I can outsmart the market, maybe this is a great time to buy. And my belief — and again, I do this for a living — is I just become overwhelmingly humbled again and again by that. So you can — I think it’s OK, my personal opinion, to take a small percent, 5-10%, and speculate on stocks. I don’t personally do it anymore because I, again, I’m tired of being humbled by the market. I like to buy the market. It treats you right over the long term and just rebalance it over time. So one of the things that I think you can do if you’re up for it is that if you’re not in something like a target date fund, you know, when I’m reviewing — I reviewed a client’s patient, actually one of the clients are about to be forgiven for PSLF. They’re two months away. Yeah, one of the things that we looked at their TSP and the spouse’s 401k, very out of balance in terms of like their equity to fixed income ratio. So one of the things we were going to go do — and we can do this for them with some of the tools that we have — is we basically rebalance that back because right now their portfolio is more conservative than what they signed up because equities are depressed and as a result, the fixed income makes up a bigger percentage. So we’re basically going to rebalance those out. Now, my counsel to them is get rid of the bonds in general. They’re about my age, a little bit older. But they’re kind of in a 90-10 stocks to bonds split. So that’s maybe one thing that you can do to tinker or change. And in reality, you should do that once or twice per year. And I think that’s good.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s a good reminder. I haven’t seen a lot of discussion on in this area of investing is making sure you’re looking at your distributions and rebalancing appropriately as a time period like this can certainly throw things off. So to your comment, you alluded to this, and I’d like to talk more about this. Question here is for several people that are listening that may be in a position to invest, you know, they might look at a time like this and say, “OK, is this a time I should be doubling down? Should I do it? Should I wait? Should I hold that money for other uses, depending on a certain time? Where do I begin to think about how to invest that money?” So talk us through more of the opportunistic side of if I have money to invest, is this a period where I want to make that move?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And again, it depends, Tim, again. I’ll say that again and again. You know, if we look at your balance sheet and you have that emergency fund that’s fully plussed up, your consumer debt is in line so you’re not really — you don’t have any credit card debt or you’re not paying that couch off that you bought a year ago when you moved into your house, you know, and you feel pretty secure, as secure as you can be, now might be a good opportunity to start increasing that 401k contribution, that 403b contribution. If you haven’t dabbled in IRAs, you can open up IRAs to basically supplement that. But you know, right now, I think because of what we’re seeing, my inclination for — in a lot of ways is to kind of sit on the cash and put it in a high-yield account, get your 1.5% interest rate now and call it a day. But you know, me personally, I have shoveled some money into the IRAs as I can, just to get that money into the market and working. But I also feel fairly confident in kind of cash position and where we’re at. So yeah, I think it depends on a lot of factors like if you’re a one-income, two-income household and just some of those other things. Now, we’ll talk about this in a second, but one of the big things is that between now — really, March 13 to end of September, for federal loans, $0 payments, 0% interest, so one of the big things — and we talk about this on the podcast all the time, if you guys are not familiar with YFP podcast, check us out. But one of the things we talk about is really acting and planning with intent. So one of the things I’m talking about with clients is hey, you have this $800 per month federal loan payment for your Pay As You Earn. Now that’s going away, and if you’re going for a forgiveness play, you know, PSLF, that still counts. The $0 payment still counts for September, all the way up until September. So what can we do with that $800? And it might be to get the emergency fund further plussed up. It could be to pay off a car, credit card debt. It could be to invest. And I think all of those things are on the table. But I think ultimately, what we don’t want to do is just say,”Oh, sweet, there’s an extra $800 into the pot.” We as humans, we see a copious resource and consume it, whether it’s time or money. So really be intentional and call out, OK, this $800 is going to go right into my Ally emergency fund — I like Ally — or some other emergency fund that you have. Or it’s going to go, I’m going to schedule that payment to go right into my IRA I can contribute for 2019 all the way up until July of this year. So lots of different kind of ways to look at it.

Tim Ulbrich: So for those that are looking to invest and have extra money that they want to then utilize this time period to implement that strategy, I would reference you back, all the way back, to November 2018, which seems forever ago, on the podcast. Episodes 072, 073, 074, 075 and 076, we did a month-long series all about investing, including the priority of investing and commonly asked questions around investing. And I think that material would be helpful to make sure you’re strategically making those decisions as you invest those funds. Tim, other question here — we’ll round out this section on investing as we transition to some of the uncertainty around work, and I’d remind people if they have questions about investing, please submit them now — is the time of rainy day fund emergency savings. You know, we normally preach and teach 3-6 months, depends on individual factors, if you have one income, two incomes, how comfortable, are you not with the amount of funds that are available, what are the priorities you’re trying to achieve? So my question here, is this a time period you look at — and you might have alluded to this a little bit already — where you say, “Maybe there is a time period where somebody who normally would be 3, maybe it should look more like 6?” Or somebody who’s normally at 6 months, this should be larger than 6 months. How do you typically advise clients on the rainy day fund during a time period like this?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, a lot of those I think have been set by like the Certified Planning Board and they’ve gone through multiple iterations of downturns in the market and things like that. You know, the danger of having more than 6 months in cash is that your cash position is too much and that you should really have some of that money into the market. Now again, that gets put to the test when you’re out of work and you can’t find employment or that type of thing. So I don’t think systemically, anything really changes. But you know, I look at my own — one of the things that I, we get stuck on sometimes is, you know, I meet with a client and I say, “Hey, your emergency fund needs to be $20,000.” And then you know, they maybe move and buy a new house, maybe they have a kid and like we don’t go back and kind of refresh that.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And that needs to be refreshed. So you know, basically what I do from the outset is I say, “Hey, this is what a good emergency fund is. This is where I would put it.” And then we build the savings around that. So I’m a big proponent of having like savings built out for things that are kind of more in line with your goals. So the emergency fund anchors that and then we have kind of secondary and tertiary savings goals. So I don’t think it really changes anything systemically, but I also like one of my bias is that for me, like if I was out of a job like this, like I would figure it out. And I don’t care what I have to do, like I would hustle. And part of that’s kind of just the entrepreneur coming out in me. Not everyone has that, you know? So if you’re more conservative with kind of going out and trying to find income streams, which sometimes pharmacists are, then maybe you do for this period of time try to shuttle away more and then when basically things come to more normalcy, then you kind of get back to that 3-6 months. So I think if you have the cash and you can plus up your account a little bit more, that makes sense. But I think as we go, a lot of the questions people are asking is like, how is this going to change society? How is this going to change how we interact with people and our spending habits and things like that? I don’t know if it really will. Maybe it does. I kind of look back at like 9/11, and you know, now we are however many years later, and it’s like ugh, I have to take my shoes off when I fly in an airplane.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And you know, I was my freshman year at West Point when that happened. And obviously that was a big, big thing in my life just like it was in everyone’s life. But I think that over time, things erode, we forget, and I think there will be a time when we can go to the movies and not feel scared about getting sick or whatever that is. And I think the same is true with our spending, how we save, and all that kind of stuff.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this is a good time as we’re wrapping up this section talking about rainy day funds, you know, one of the things that I always mention, especially when you have two people that are working through a financial plan together, is I don’t think this is the place to push somebody else.

Tim Baker: No, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So really making sure you are having an honest conversation about during uncertainty like this, sometimes it’s not rational, what makes you comfortable? And obviously there has to be a reasonable balance of that as you’re trying to achieve other goals and do other things. You know, as you mentioned, you don’t want to have too much in the cash position. But if you’re splitting hairs between 4 and 5 months and somebody is more comfortable with 5 months or 6 months, like this is the place to defer, you know, as you look at making sure that both spouses, both individuals that are working on this together are comfortable with that. So Drew, at this point, as we wrap up this investing section and talk about COVID-19 and the financial implications as it relates to investing, I want to pause here and address any questions that have come in specific to investing as we move on to the next topic about work uncertainty.

Drew: Sure, thanks, Tim. So we’ll start with the first question here. For those at home who are kind of relying on financial planners to really manage their investments and maybe they’re looking to gain more knowledge and education around this topic, where might you guys recommend that they start to get that education and really start to learn about investing on their own?

Tim Ulbrich: Great question. Tim Baker, do you want to start and then I’ll chime in?

Tim Baker: I mean, I’m biased. I think right here, right? Like this is a good spot. What I tell clients when we go through any part of the financial plan, whether it’s the fundamentals: insurance and benefits, retirement investment, estate, tax credits, negotiation, whatever that is, just to kind of name a few parts of the plans that we cover, I want to educate clients in a way that it’s enough to make you dangerous but not enough to bore you to death. So we probably could release — I mean, you know, what Tim and Tim wrote, “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” is another great tool, resource, to — if you’re a reader, you know, I can probably name off a bunch on my kind of read list that would go onto the Mount Rushmore of investment books to read: “Index Revolution” is one. I don’t know, Tim, what am I missing here?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great recommendations on books. “MONEY Master the Game” is something that I typically recommend as a book.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: They do a nice job some of the complexities of investing in a very easy to understand way. Obviously, I put a plug in for our comprehensive financial planning services that Your Financial Pharmacist specifically designed for pharmacy professionals. And you can learn more about that at YFPPlanning.com. And we have some exclusive benefits to APhA members. Two other things that jump out to me: One, I mentioned the investing series we did on the podcast back in November 2018. Again, Episodes 072-076. So you can download that on Apple podcasts, Spotify, or wherever you get your podcasts each and every week — sounds like a commercial. And then the last thing for APhA members, since we’re here obviously in that, is that we’ve done — you’ve done — previous webinars I believe Investing 101, Investing 102, that are available recorded. And again, you can access those at pharmacists.com/YFP. So I think a whole lot of resources, probably strategically identifying one or two to get started and not getting overwhelmed. But I think even for those that have a financial planner, you know, whether it’s us or somebody else, I think making sure — this is true of any part of the financial plan — making sure you’re educated and up-to-speed yourself I think just leads to a richer conversation and a greater understanding and you’re asking more questions, typically, when you are more knowledgeable about a topic. So you know, I think sometimes there’s a tendency to say, “Oh, I’ve got my investment guy, right? I’ve got somebody that’s doing this for me.” And I think it’s always helpful to have some of the base knowledge yourself as well. Awesome. Drew, what else?

Drew: Awesome. Thanks, Tim. Next question. Is it risky to put money into a savings account where you don’t have close access to the bank? Also, should you have some money not in the bank in case the market crashes?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s a good question. So the first question I’m guessing they’re referring to like an online bank perhaps is the way I interpret that versus like a local branch that you can walk through the doors. I mean, I don’t know, Tim Baker, how you feel. I don’t necessarily view online banks such as Ally, CIT Bank, others that are out there that have online savings accounts, to me, I don’t like at that any different than me walking through the doors of a Huntington branch here in Columbus. You know, as long as they’re FDI-insured, obviously you’re looking for competitive product and offering. I feel like from a security standpoint and an offering standpoint, I very much view a physical location similar to an online bank. And obviously you and I have both used Ally extensively and are comfortable with that. What are your thoughts on the cash part of it? This has come up before, I think in our webinar last week about is this a time period where you actually want to have physical cash in hand. What are your thoughts on that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I had a client ask me this, and I’ve been asked this a couple times since this has all been going on. And I can’t see — I have like a strong — you know, I actually had a client talk about it today. You know, it’s like, we’re not Doomsdayers, but should we keep some cash in the house? And I’m like, I don’t know. I feel like the banks, one of the lessons learned from the last crisis, the banks are more robust and stronger than they’ve probably ever been. And at the end of the day, like what the government is trying to do is figure out ways to get money into the hands of the people and really businesses. So I don’t have this overwhelming personal need to have stacks of cash in a safe in my house in Baltimore, Maryland. So you know, and I remember the first time I talked about this with a client, I said, “You know, if there is a run on like ATMs, maybe that could be a thing. But then you could always go to the grocery store and like take out cash when you did.” But the second I said that the last two times, I’ve been to the grocery store. They basically turned that off.

Tim Ulbrich: Turned it off, yep.

Tim Baker: And my thought was like, OK, grocery stores are flush because everyone’s buying toilet paper and everything else. But yeah, so maybe. I think though, it’s like you can do everything electronic these days anyway. So people are like, what if you need cash? I’m like, Venmo or PayPal? They’re like, well my parents are old, they’re older and they haven’t used all that stuff. I don’t know. I just don’t — I personally don’t see it. But again, a lot of this goes back to how you feel. So if it makes you feel better to have $1,000 in the house, then do it. I don’t think there’s anything terribly wrong with it. I feel like growing up, my mom would hide money around the house. I don’t know why, it was just one of her things, you know, just like little nest eggs. So I don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree with you. And I think unfortunately, right now since we’re all pretty much quarantined for the most part is if I had $1,000 in cash, I ain’t really going anywhere where I can spend that cash right now. You know, most of it at least what we’re doing from grocery and other standpoint, you know, we’re pre-ordering and picking it up and that kind of thing. So good question, thought, but I echo your comments and feelings. I think you’ve also got to ask yourself, how does this make you feel? And how does that sway your decisions?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and another thing I talk to clients about is like, I’ll say something to the effect of like outside the Zombie Apocalypse, the market’s going to go up. And if we have the Zombie Apocalypse, we have such bigger problems than our investment portfolio. And I think the same is true, it’s like if all of a sudden the banks collapse and we can’t get cash, like the cash might be worthless, you know? So there might be more systemic things to worry about. So probably not the right kind of tone of the conversation, but I just, yeah, I think you’re OK with trusting the banks.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and if that happens, you’re not making student loan payments.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: A lot of things aren’t getting paid.

Tim Baker: Right, I agree.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a depressing thought. So Drew, how about one more before we keep the ball rolling and move onto the next section? And then we can also hold some time at the end.

Drew: Sure. Absolutely. And I just wanted to mention, guys, I know we have a lot of questions coming in, a lot of questions around student loan repayment, and so we do have a couple more topics, one of those being student loan repayment. So we will do our best to get to those questions. So I think we’ll just finish up with a comment. We had a comment from someone come in, they said they’re a member of the Pharmacist Stock Club. It’s a great local opportunity for meeting, learning, and idea sharing. So if you’re interested, try to find and join a local club. So I just wanted to follow up to the question we had earlier about kind of getting started in investing and learning about those options. So I thought that was a good comment to add.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: For sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Very cool. I love the passion for learning. And whoever submitted that comment, I’d love to hear more from you about what that looks like and how you do it and perhaps we can share with others that may be looking to start something in their own community or even in these times, start something virtually. So let’s transition to the next area, which I would say led the way in those that registered. When we asked the question, you know, what are you most concerned with your financial plan as it relates to COVID-19, there was this bucket around uncertainty of work. And we know certain situations — I would say they’re not very frequent right now from what we can gather — but we know there’s certain situations where folks have reduced hours because of lower senses at the hospital as they’re waiting for the surges to happen into the future. You know, we do know that many might be impacted by whether it’s not necessarily their own cut hours, it could be a spouse, a family member that is being impacted, or somebody that has a business or a side hustle, I think about things like Airbnb income, or it could be somebody that even gets sick with COVID and is unable to work for a period of time. So you know, I think this is an important topic that we spend a little bit of time in. And I want to kick off the discussion here, Tim Baker, for those that are listening and are concerned about either current situations of reduced hours or that that may come in the future or their job is impacted in one way or another, what are some things that they can be thinking about with their financial plan to prepare for that situation? Big question, I know.
Tim Baker: Yeah, so there’s so many different facets to this point. So like, you know, one of the things and really the ink is still drying, so maybe I’ll talk more about the CARES Act that President Trump signed into law last Friday. So real quick, the CARES Act stands for the Coronavirus Aid Relief and Economic Securities Act that was passed by the Senate, then the House, then signed into law by Trump last Friday. We’re still basically reading and deciphering like what is actually included in here and how it’s all going to work. But really, it’s a $2 trillion emergency fiscal stimulus package, which is aimed to ease the effects of kind of the economic damage that that this is really causing. This is the largest economic stimulus package in U.S. history, actually it’s more like $6 trillion when you factor in like loan provisions and guarantees that the U.S. government is making. A good part of this, about half a trillion, $500 billion, is for stimulus checks, could be more for — $500 billion for severely damaged industries, $400 for wages and payroll tax relief and on and on. So I think the biggest thing that I would probably do if I was concerned or if I was furloughed or something like that is actually file for unemployment. So we did see a big spike, probably the largest spike I think ever, 3.3 million people filed for unemployment between March 15 and March 21. That was the biggest I think spike in history. But a lot of people, they’re like, ah, there’s maybe a stigma side. It doesn’t matter. At the end of the day, we’ve got to pay the bills. You pay into it as a taxpayer, so this is a benefit for the purposes of that is to actually file for unemployment. And what the CARES Act does is actually has expanded that in terms of what you potentially get from an unemployment perspective. Another thing to do is actually take stock, look at your balance sheet. So obviously we’ve been talking about the power of the emergency fund and being able to look at OK, what is your burn rate? How many months can you basically get by without any income? And then if we supplement this with some of the other incomes out there, how do we do this? But one of the big things that you now have access to that you didn’t have access to before were things like your retirement plans, IRAs, 401k’s, 403b’s. You can actually take distributions up to $100,000 in 2020. You have to take the distribution in 2020 from these IRAs and employer-sponsored plans, without penalty. So as long as you’ve been affected by the coronavirus — and this is a very broad interpretation — you either have to be diagnosed, have a spouse or dependent diagnosed, you’ve experienced adverse financial consequences as a result, you’re unable to work because you can’t get daycare, you own your own business and it had to close, very, very broad. You basically are exempt from the 10% penalty. So most people know that once you put money into an IRA, a 401k, once it hits that bucket, for you to get it out, it’s a 10% penalty to get those moneys out. That goes away. A lot of times, you had to withhold if you were taking money out of or rolling over a 401k, you had to withhold 20%. And the reason that they do this is people take that money out, and it’s recognized as income. And then when the tax bill comes due, they’re like, oh, I forgot that I have a $50,000 tax bill or a $20,000 tax bill. The withholding goes away. And you can actually — you can repay this back. So you could say, “Hey, I need this $100,000 today for 2020,” and then over the next three years, you can pay it back or not without penalty. So that’s another thing that you can do. The other thing that they also did is they enhanced 401k. So most 401k’s, 403b’s, have provisions for you to take money and basically for hardships. So they’ve kind of done some broad strokes here. So typically, the maximum that you can take from a 401k was $50,000. Now they doubled that to $100,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: Basically, it used to be that you could only take 50% of the vested balance. So if I had a $40,000 401k, I could only take $20,000 of that. Now it’s basically you can take 100% of what’s vested. So if I have $40,000, I could take all $40,000 up to a maximum of $100,000. And then the big thing here is when you take money from the 401k, you typically pay that back as part of your paycheck with an interest payment. All of this, all of those payments will be delayed for at least up to a year. So those assets on your balance sheet, when you’re looking at OK, how do I get through this? You do have some levers to pull. And obviously some of the things that we always talk about is the emergency fund, you could always basically put in your — or take out what you put into a Roth, that comes out without penalty. You know, I think the big thing that I always talk about is diversifying your income streams.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So you know, I think we as Americans, just people, we say, “OK, this is our paycheck,” and we self-cap our income. But especially now, and I often wonder like to me, the things I’m really interested coming out of the coronavirus is what are all the things that we see as problems or we’re just sitting around and like here’s a solution.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So it could be where a business idea is born out — typically, that takes a lot of ramp-up, so maybe it’s not now. But you know, big things like could you deliver for Amazon? I would do it in a second. I love to drive around, listen to stuff, that would be fine by me. Some people are like nope, don’t want to do that, I want to stay quarantined. But thinking of ways to diversify income is big. And then probably just do a bottom-up approach to your budget. Really look at that. You know, obviously, growing top-line income I think can have far ramifications. But looking at your budget and say, “OK, do I really need” — like my wife and I, we do cleaners once a month. They’re not coming to our house because they don’t want to get infected. So that’s out of the budget. But things like that that you can basically say, OK, is this something that I absolutely need to have? You can wipe out your student loan payment. A lot of banks are forgoing mortgages, so you can contact your bank and say, “Hey, coronavirus, no loan payment for the foreseeable future.” So there’s lots of different things like that that I think are big to kind of get us through this tough period. Tim, did I leave anything else out?

Tim Ulbrich: No, that’s really comprehensive. And I’m glad you talked about all the different levers you can pull. And I’m glad you started with unemployment claims because I think there is a stigma. I know it’s something I would struggle with. But I think we have to remember that this was passed for this specific reason. So if we have somebody on the call tonight who is having a financial hardship, has reduced hours, has lost their job, has been furloughed, whatever be the case, I think starting there — because the way I think about this is of all the things you talked about, in what order am I going to pull the levers, right? So the way I think I would think about this is if I can file for unemployment and because of the CARES Act, we see that there’s some extra provisions there with additional benefits from the state and it’s a longer time period, things like that, but if I can then know what I’m looking at in terms of unemployment and then rework my budget, then I kind of know what else do I need to do. Do I need to pull from the emergency fund? Do I need to put the mortgage payment on pause? I don’t have to worry about the student loan payment. Do I need to pull money from a 401k or a 403b or an IRA? But I think objectively, starting with what can you get in terms of replacing income? And then working backwards and identifying what other moves you can make to help in that. So Tim, talk us through — and you might have mentioned this. I just want to make sure that those are on — those that are on are tracking with me as well. If I were to pull or need to pull let’s say $40,000 from my 401k or 403b, you mentioned that that has to be in this year, 2020. Obviously, those are pre-tax contributions. So is that then I would assume just treated as taxable income this year? Can I spread it out? And how should I also be thinking about the tax implications of that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so one of the kind weird things or odd things about this but actually interesting is that you know, let’s take it the round number of $90,000 as an example. So if you can — say you take $90,000 out of your 401k. Now, you don’t get the 10% penalty, which is awesome. You get that cash immediately. So you don’t have to withhold anything. And then you have the eligibility repaid over three years if you want or not. But basically, you can recognize that income either all the $90,000 that you take out in 2020. So let’s pretend that I’m a service worker, and I make $30,000 this year. And I take $90,000 out. Now, I can basically recognize — so I basically am taxed on the $120,000 for 2020. Or I can basically spread out that adjustment between — or that distribution — across three years. So I could take $30,000 in 2020, $30,000 in 2021 and $30,000 in 2022. Now, this is where working with a savvy tax professional like our Paul Eichenberg might help this. But it’s either one or the other. So you can’t like — it’s either like spread it out evenly for three years, which probably more often than not, that makes the most sense if you can defer it out. Or if it’s a really bad year and you want to basically hey, maybe it’s $40,000 that you need, it makes sense to take it all in 2020 because you know, basically you’re shut down, you’re not making any income. Maybe it makes sense to do that. So it just depends on how you elected to do that. Another point about the unemployment that I will say is, you know, again, I kind of think about it kind of like social security. Like you pay into that over the course of your life. Same thing with unemployment. You pay into that. Some of the things that they did with the CARES Act is that the waiting period goes away. So before, you had to typically wait.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: Basically the federal government will cover the first week of unemployment. There’s a fund called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance, which is typically if you don’t qualify for anything else, it’s typically for self-employed individuals or contractors. That’s available for you. They’ve actually plussed up — so like the regular state unemployment benefit is increased by $600 per week. Just to give you some context, the average, the typical unemployment check, is $385 per week.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it was big news.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So it’s now like more than double the bonus on top of that. And you get this — and this was probably one of the big things that tied it up in the Congress.

Tim Ulbrich: Senate.

Tim Baker: The Senate, was because they thought that the benefit was too generous where it would disincentivize people from basically going out and looking for work. But they capped it at basically four months. But the extension of the overall benefits go 13 extra weeks. So again, you know, this is — right now, we’re in a time where like we’re cooped up, you know, maybe we’re feeling a little blue, maybe this half of unemployment, this shouldn’t — this doesn’t define you. This is not part of who you are.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tim Baker: And even like businesses, we’re going to see businesses that are not going to be able to survive this. And it’s a shame because it’s not something that they necessarily did wrong. It’s just a systemic thing that came along, and I think the government is trying to do whatever they can to basically keep businesses afloat and keep people on payrolls and things like that. But this is not a poor reflection of you and what you’re doing. So I just want to make that point because that’s a real thing for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Great reminder. And I think this is also a good time to remind you, we talk about things like the CARES Act, and we’ll talk about the student loans here in a moment. Here you’re talking about unemployment and the additional $600 a week benefit and the timeline of that being up to four months. I think this is a good time to remind that you know, some of this may be extended. Time will tell. We don’t know. So what we know right now is what’s been passed. But I think we will continue to keep an eye out for discussions. There’s already discussions of a fourth stimulus type of package that is in the works that I was reading about this morning. So I think stay tuned. And if you’re not already part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join us as we’re trying to stay as up-to-date as we can on all of this information. So before we jump into student loans, Tim, I thought it would helpful since we talked about unemployment and the CARES Act extensively, let’s talk for a moment about the stimulus checks. Who’s getting them? Who’s not? Timeline? And what can people expect here? Because I think we’re going to have some people listening, many people perhaps, that won’t get these or will get a reduced amount. So I don’t want to spend a ton of time here, and this has probably gotten the most wide press compared to some of the other items. But let’s talk for a moment here before we take some questions and then transition into student loans.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so this is Section 2201, the recovery rebates to individuals. Now, the stats out there is that 90% of taxpayers should receive something. I’m not sure what percent or pharmacists will receive this, but essentially this is a credit against 2020 income taxes. So everyone basically has a starting amount and then it gets reduced based on your AGI, you Adjusted Gross Income. So what we use — so as broad strokes, basically it’s $1,200 for each individual or $2,400 for married couples and then $500 per child essentially under 17. So if they’re 17, they don’t get it. Basically, under 17. The phase-outs for this are basically if you’re married filing jointly, it’s $150,000. And then head of household is $112,500 AGI. And then all other filers is $75,000. So basically, the way that you calculate this is if you’re a single taxpayer and you have one kid, that’s $1,200 plus $500 for the child. So that’s a $1,700 refundable credit. If you’re a married couple with one child, you basically have $2,400 plus $500 is the $2,900. Now, you take that as the starting point and then you look at your AGI. So in that first example, if you made $65,000 as a single individual, then you would get 100% of that $1,700.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: If you made $76,000, which is $1,000 above the threshold, then your benefit would be reduced by I think it’s $50 for every $1,000. So in that case, it would be not $1,700. It would be $1,650.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: So the same thing with the married filing jointly, one kid, $2,400 for the couple, $500 for the child, that’s $2,900. If they made basically $151,000, it would basically be reduced by $50. So $2,850 instead of the $2,900. So you start with basically the family situation, then you apply the income, and then you reduce it as such. So for a lot of pharmacists, you know — and again, so the other caveat to this is they’re going to look at the last tax return on file. So if you are not a procrastinator or you filed your taxes early, good for you. They’re going to look at your 2019 return. If you haven’t filed your taxes or you’re like, hey, extension, more time to use, then they’re going to look at 2018. Now, at the end of the day, it will be basically be chewed up on the 2020 tax return. So they’re not going to claw anything back. So let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is lower than what it is today, you still get that rebate and they’re not going to claw that back. But let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is higher and you get furloughed, you might not get it today. And I would estimate checks will start coming — checks are deposited and will start coming in May. You might get it today, but you could get it when you file your 2020 taxes. Now, does that help you? No. It doesn’t necessarily help you today. But the idea is that in future tax returns, you’ll be indemnified essentially to that, to what you’re — so here’s an example. I’m not going to file my 2019 taxes anytime soon because of a lot of the changes that I had in my household, the business, that type of thing. So our son Liam was born last year. So he’s — to the IRS, he doesn’t really exist right now. So when we go to file for 2020, I expect a $500 credit for him.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So that’s an example. Now, there are some maybe thoughts about the ethics of this in terms of like, hey, should I file my 2019 because it will give me a better credit? The answer is yes. You should. Or should I wait to file? The answer is yes. That’s just good financial planning, it’s good sense. At the end of the day, this is tax money that they’re basically returning to you. So to me, you know, regardless of where you’re at, whether you are in a position where income is fine and stable, we don’t know that in the future. So to me is this is the system that’s there. It’s just like with taxes, what we say is we want to pay the least amount of taxes humanly possible. That’s legally. That’s legally possible. So we’re not going to pay more than that. So the same thing is that if you can get a better benefit, then you should go for that for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’re talking about legal tax strategies. So let’s be very clear on that.

Tim Baker: Exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s an important point. So Tim Baker, when you’re throwing around terms like clawback, you’re not using pharmacy lingo like PBM clawbacks and other things.

Tim Baker: Yeah, sorry.

Tim Ulbrich: There will be no clawbacks here though, just to be clear.

Tim Baker: No clawbacks.

Tim Ulbrich: For those who are used to clawbacks. So Drew, let’s stop here and take a couple questions related to work uncertainty before we move onto student loans.

Drew: Sure, Tim. First question, will this Act allow for small business owners to file for unemployment when they typically would not qualify?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so that — exactly right. So typically as a small business owner, you don’t get into that party. But the Pandemic fund that I mentioned is typically going to be for those small business owners, those contractors, that wouldn’t otherwise qualify. So that’s the fund that they’re probably going to basically dip into. It’s called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance program. It’s a federal program. And that’s, to me, that’s where I would definitely go.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I was thinking today, Tim Baker, about all of the people that — we talk about on the podcast all the time about side hustling, you know, whether it’s Airbnb, Rover, the list goes on and on. And how many of those are being impacted in a time like this? So it’s certainly something to consider. What else, Drew?

Drew: Thanks, guys. Another interesting question from an independent pharmacy owner. Do you guys have more insight into any assistance that may come in the future? For example, if their business is doing well right now, they’re showing an increase in revenue over the last few weeks. However, they could foresee a slump in the coming months, for example, if they’ve had patients who filled refills early or for 90 days. So therefore, they may need assistance in the future. What do you guys think about that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so actually, one of the changes in the bill — so there are some healthcare-related rules, and I’ll run through those really quickly. So there’s definition of medical expenses is expanded, specifically for HSAs and FSAs. So a lot of eligible medical expenses will now include over-the-counter meds. So that’s a big one. But one of the things that they talked about too is Part D recipients can request up to a 90-day supply. And it’s just a matter of kind of limiting seniors from basically having to go out and those type of things. Telehealth is another big thing that’s been temporary covered by HSA-eligible high-deductible plans. So as part of that, though, to go back to the kind of independent side, one of the major parts of this legislation, the CARES Act is the Paycheck Protection Program, which is essentially — it looks like free money in a lot of ways. So if you are a pharmacy owner out there and you’re like, hey, things are OK now but we could be affected — and actually, Tim, I don’t know if you saw this email. But you know, our bank, our business bank, actually sent us kind of an email about this that said, “Hey, you may be eligible. Check this out.”

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And it basically outlined a lot of the big — so it’s basically, it’s guaranteed by the Small Business Administration and issued by SBA-approved lenders. You’ve got to apply for this type of loan by June 3. And the maximum duration of the loan is 10 years. So this is typically for a business that has less than 500 employees. You do have to basically in good faith certify that the loan is necessary due to uncertainty of current economic conditions caused by the coronavirus. Now that’s again a broad definition there. And I would say like if you are in the toilet paper or the hand sanitizer business, you should not be applying for this because that would be fraud. But the interesting part of this is that the max loan is the lesser of $10 million, or 2.5 times the average monthly payroll costs of the previous year. And the proceeds can be used for payroll, group health insurance premiums, salaries, rent, utilities. And 100% of that could be forgiven if it’s used during the first 8 weeks that you get the loan.

Tim Ulbrich: Which is crazy.

Tim Baker: And you don’t lay off employees. So you have to basically kind of have the same employees, you have to pay them more or less the same amount, but it’s pretty generous. And the rates for small business rates are typically higher. The rates, the maximum that you can be charged is 4%. The discharge debt is nontaxable. And those initial payments are going to be deferred for at least 6 if not 12 months. So I have an independent pharmacy owner that I was talking to earlier this week and he’s like, “Is this for life?” And I’m like, “I think so. But let me read up more about it.” Because potentially, again, it’s one of those things that’s uncertainty about this. And there’s a lot of businesses that you could probably chalk that up to now go apply for these loans, I think it’s a pain in the neck. So it’s something to consider though.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and get your pen ready I think to do the paperwork. But speaking of toilet paper companies, Tim Baker, I saw a toilet paper startup company I was reading about this morning that I thought was interesting. But I think on a serious note — and we actually were having this conversation before we jumped on this evening — I would encourage whoever asked that question or others that might be this would be impacting is to try to really, really intentionally self-assess, even if you’re not, again, at a good faith statement, even if you’re not impacted today, you know, as you look out in the future and trends and how that business will change, could you be heading in that direction where challenges may present themselves, payroll might be an issue. Or if you’re thinking ahead to the business, you know, that changes hiring or how you’re leveraging resources, I think really taking a step back to say, of course you want to be in good faith, but if there’s not impacts that are happening today that are significant, is that something that could be coming in the future if this continues? So Drew, how about one more and then we’ll transition to student loans.

Drew: Sure, guys. So if someone was unemployed before the CARES Act was passed, could they still have the increase to $600 a week?

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t know that question. My gut would assume yes, they would, but I don’t know the answer to that. Do you, Tim?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think yes. And again, part of this is just if you think about the administration of this to say like, you know, when — I’m pretty sure that — well, maybe it depends. I’m not going to say yes or no to that. That might be something we have to look at. So if you were unemployed before this was signed into law, how does that affect your unemployment? Let me try to find some answers to that. If that person could email us at [email protected], I’ll research and get back to you. That’s a good question.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I would like to think — maybe it’s half glass full — I’d like to think that they wouldn’t penalize somebody because of the timing of that.

Tim Baker: But I do know they were making a big deal about the actual date in which he signs. So it could basically be dated. That’s kind of the line, the demarkation.

Tim Ulbrich: That makes sense.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. Alright, let’s move to student loans, probably a lot to discuss here and it sounds like from Drew’s comment earlier, we have a lot of questions. So we talked a little bit about the CARES Act and student loans, but let’s dig in in more detail, Tim. You know, as I mentioned in the introduction, we had a lot of news around student loans, starting with the 60-day interest freeze to the 60-day no payment with the interest freeze and then obviously the big news that came as part of the CARES Act of no payments for six months with no interest that will accrue during that time. And that was really I think the big news on student loans. So talk to us a little bit about that news as well as what that means for people that are pursuing loan forgiveness and then which federal loans are included and what’s not included.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, the big news obviously, like you said, is that for federal student loan payments — so we’re not talking about your private refi’s. And this is really direct loans, so we’re not even really talking about FFEL loans or even Perkins loans or things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Tim Baker: We’re really talking about the direct loans that are out there. Automatically, you’re going to basically pay 0% interest effective March 13 to September 20 of this year. And then also, payments will be suspended automatically over the course of the time. Now, we’re still talking to clients and people that are saying like, hey, they’re not suspended. Student loan servicers, one, I think part of the — I’ll give them a little bit of grace because I think they’re understaffed right now because of everything that’s going on but also they’re just — they are notoriously poor at answering questions, responding to borrowers and that type of thing. So it could take a little bit of time for them to kind of get everything on board. But I looked at the FedLoan page as one of the big federal loan servicers, and they said if there is any delay, everything will be retroactively counted and things like that. So you know, typically the big ones are FedLoan, Navient, NelNet, Great Lakes, those are all federal loan providers. So required payments are suspended. And you don’t really have to do anything. And probably it’s better if you don’t do anything because I guarantee you if one person calls and they get one direction and then the next, you could call five minutes later and get a completely separate, different direction. So the big takeaway here is that, you know, from a federal student loan perspective, no interest, no payments until basically September 30. So I think the big thing is depending on where you’re at is to kind of look at, OK, as an example, I have an $800 payment. In most cases, you should not be paying that. We should be directing that elsewhere, which could be looking at plussing up the emergency fund a little bit more, paying down consumer debt or other high-interest debt, it could be invested. So be very, very intentional about how you want to direct that payment. Again, typically if we’re not, we see lifestyle creep and things like that. That $800 gets lost in the fold. So we want to make sure that we’re really intentional with that. Another big thing is that involuntarily debt collections will be basically put on hold and suspended. So if we have anybody out there that’s kind of in those dire straits, you’d have a little bit of reprieve there. If you’re in school, if we have students on here, I think the big thing that’s going to be different is basically you’re going to take all of your unsubsidized loans and they’re going to subsidized. So essentially for those months, you’ll basically not accrue any interest, which is a big deal because that bill is basically tacked on daily. I’m trying to think — now for, I mentioned for federal loans or for private loans and FFEL loans, you kind of got cut out of this deal. So this is one of the things that’s very unfortunate because typically the people that are trying to refinance are really trying to take a proactive approach to paying off their loans. So in the decision tree, it’s typically hey, is forgiveness on the table, whether it’s PSLF or non-PSLF. If it’s not, you’re like, “Hey, Tim, not cool. Don’t trust the federal or the forgiveness program,” which I think is a viable program, you then go to comparing your standard payment to a refi. And typically, refi rates have been so much better than what you get coming out of school, so it makes sense to basically shift over from the federal government to the private. Now you’re basically being penalized for taking a more proactive approach to paying off your loans whereas a forgiveness option or forgiveness play is more of a reactive approach, unfortunately. So you can consolidate loans. I think that if you consolidate them down, a FFEL loan, so this is federal loans that aren’t part of this, you can consolidate a FFEL or even a Perkins loan down and potentially get some type of reprieve on that. Typically when you do that, if you are looking at a forgiveness option — actually, you probably want to not look at that unless you can pick out those loans specifically. That can be a big problem. I think those are the main talking points.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, just to reiterate some of the things you mentioned. I think this is huge news, especially for those that may be hearing this for the first, second or even third time I mean, for that matter. No payments on qualifying federal loans until September 30. Again, who knows? This may or may not be extended. Time will tell. No interest that accrues during the interim. And this will count towards loan forgiveness. So for the client you mentioned earlier that has two months left of PSLF, they’re getting a free ride on the last two payments, huh?

Tim Baker: Well, I told her, I was like, I think that you paid your last student loan payment. And she had the biggest smile ever.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. That’s really cool.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So if somebody does make a payment — and I’m grateful for what you said about really taking a step back and being strategic — obviously would then just go toward directly to the principal, right?

Tim Baker: Yes, correct. Now, according to like FedLoan, they would basically figure out a way to like make you hold so you get that full benefit. I have no idea, and I have very little confidence that will actually happen, so I think one of the questions is, how do I know that if my payments count toward PSLF, I would be tracking them because one of the — although I’ve said it time and time again, I think PSLF is a very viable strategy and I think it does have legs despite the kind of national news about it, you can’t argue with the math. But the administration of this is awful, in my opinion. The Department of Education is supposed to be basically providing oversight for FedLoan, and you know, by and large, they bumbled that program. So there’s lots of handholding, there’s lots of uncertainty around it, but at the end of the day, you have to basically cross your t’s and dot your i’s, just make sure that you’re babysitting them, so to speak. So you know, I think running — one of the things you could potentially do is run an NSLDS report, which is just basically the text document that basically shows the birth to the death of the loan. So basically a month-by-month description. So run that kind of now and then run it afterwards and kind of just see where you’re at in terms of your overall PSLF count. I think that’s what I would do.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, this will as we get through this storm and we talk about PSLF in the future, I think this will be another example point just like last year when they added some funding to the program to help make up for some borrowers that ran into issues, especially those first couple years of applying for forgiveness. I think this will be another tick in the column of you know, it looks pretty good for the longevity of PSLF or the grandfathering of borrowers that are currently there. So does this — Tim, my question is, you know, for those that are or were thinking about refinance, does this effectively make refinance a moot point for this six-month period?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, I guess there could be certain like instances where you can — because I think one of the things that I am kind of concerned about is some of these companies that are offering refi can’t stay solvent because eventually, effectively, you wiped away a lot of their market because of the 0%. So there’s going to be a lot less people jumping from the federal to the private. Now, I guess you could have some people that go from a private to a private refi.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So it’s like hey, I have this 5%, I can get a 3.25%. That’s a little bit better. But I think it’s like 90% — isn’t it like 90% of loans are federal loans or something else?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’ve seen that tick up in rates.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah, so the rates — that’s the other thing. Rates have gone up. So and they’ve been yo-yoing. I wouldn’t be surprised if they went back down.

Tim Ulbrich: Agreed.

Tim Baker: So you know, if I could get in, I would probably have to be somewhat through the benefit period. But if I’m 3-4 months in and I can get a rate that’s really, really aggressive, you know, maybe like 2%, I might consider that as an option just to kind of lock that in. But yeah, I mean, I think it really doesn’t make a whole lot of sense to leave that, to leave the federal system. And I think the other thing to kind of note is the federal loans, they are more generous when it comes to like hardships and things like that because they’re backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. taxpayer where some of these other companies are not. They don’t have that bank account standing behind them. So they can’t be as generous with them. Now, a lot of them have matched a lot of the kind of the forgiveness upon death and disability and they will work with you on a hardship. And I would say if you do have private loans and you can’t make the payments, contact the Earnest, CommonBond, Credible, whoever it is, and say, “What can we do?” And a lot of times, they will work with you. But they’re also, they’re kind of in dire straits as well. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And you know, we talk a lot about on the podcast and the blog on the pros and cons of refinance. So I’m going to have to update my slides in the future, you know, something we could have never predicted, but a COVID-19-like situation where you have something like six months of federal loan payments being paused and 0% interest. I could not have ever predicted this happening. So — and just to add on your comment, Tim, before we take questions, I think it’s a really important reminder that we certainly want to extend them some grace in this moment where they’re dealing with a lot as well, but the loan servicing companies — we even have an example today from one of our Certified Financial Planners, Robert Lopez, who was on the phone with them and I think in his words was really after being on hold, was less than helpful in their response. And I think that can happen in terms of incorrect information or they’re overwhelmed. And we’ve heard that before. This is not the first time. So making sure that what you hear is lining up with other things you’ve heard or if you think, you know, that doesn’t right, making sure you’re fact-checking that.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and the thing that he said to me when I talked to him about it was like, yeah, and she was just very, very confident in her answer but completely wrong, which is — that’s the problem because it’s not like the student loans are a black-and-white issue. There’s lots of nuance and intricacies and when you’re calling up someone on such a big thing, we’re talking potentially six figures of debt, you want to walk away like feeling confident that the advice or the counsel that that person on the other line gave you was sound. And more often than not, it’s just not. And it’s not necessarily the fault of the person, it’s just that they’re not trained very well. And that’s a shame because I think we’re seeing — you know, and that’s one of the bad publicity angles is like hey, I was told this and it was completely something different, you know?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So that’s why I think sometimes working with someone to help cross t’s and dot i’s and get you to that finish line is really, really important because there’s just a lot of potential hoops to jump through. And it’s not just — you know, there’s so many different — even like the tax ramifications with student loans, that’s one of the reasons that we started doing taxes at YFP is like I was tired of basically referring people out to professionals that had no idea how to handle the taxes. So I’m like, we have to do it in-house. And that’s what we do.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Great stuff, Tim Baker, as always. So Drew, you had mentioned earlier lots of questions around student loans, so let’s tackle a handful of those.

Drew: Alright. So the first question, would you consider reconsolidating federal loans for a low rate? Or wait until after September? What if this rate is only offered over the next month?

Tim Baker: So I think we’re kind of conflating two issues if I’m using that word correctly. So consolidation or reconsolidation and refinance are completely separate things. So when you consolidate, when you consolidate your loans, you’re basically taking two or more federal loans, so think Direct Plus, Direct Unsubsidized, Direct Stafford Subsidized, and you’re basically shrinking those down into really one or two loans, more than likely two. You have a Direct Consolidation Unsubsidized loan, and a Direct Consolidation Subsidized loan. The reason that you do consolidation is two reasons: One is for convenience. So you guys know as pharmacists, you have a crapton of loans that are pages long. If you look at your credit report, it’s a mess because every basically disbursement is a record in your credit report. So you do it kind of for ease of use, for convenience. The second reason that you do it is to kind of solve the square peg, round hole. So like we mentioned, some of those FFEL loans and some of those other loans that are out there that a little bit older, they don’t qualify for some of those income-driven plans that are out there that then allow you to be forgiven, to get into some of the forgiveness programs. So it’s basically consolidate those down and then get into those IBR, ICR, PAYE or in a Revised Pay As You Earn. Now, the key here is that you’re just taking a weighted balance in interest rate. So you’re not getting any better terms or deals or anything like that. So if you had, you know, 6% and 5% and 4%, they’d just weight those together and now your new rate is 5.4% as an example. So when you — so that’s consolidation. When you refinance, you’re basically saying, deuces, federal government. Thanks for lending me the money, but I’m going to take my income, my credit score, my payment history, and I’m going to go out to the Credibles of the world, some of these other companies, and I’m going to try to find a better deal, a better terms for myself. So you know, I use kind of 6% as the line of demarkation. So anything higher than 6% on your federal loans is typically high. Anything low is typically — lower than that is typically pretty good. But if you have an average weighted interest rate of 5.8%, at a 10-year, that’s your default, a 10-year standard repayment, you can even today with the rates that are out there, you can beat 5.8%, so that’s where you would do an apples-to-apples comparison to a 10-year with a Credible or a CommonBond or something like that. You might get 4.9%. I’m just making up rates right now. So you would say, OK, better terms, lower payment, that type of thing. So to answer your question, do I think — so those are really the big differences. Now, the big thing to remember is that once you go from the federal to the private, there’s no going back. So that’s why a lot — I was kind of bemoaning the fact that people that have made that decision to say, “Thanks, federal government, it’s been real. Thanks for loaning me the money, I’m going to take it from here and go to a private company,” they’re kind of left in the dark a little bit because there’s no relief for them. So and they can’t go back. So they can’t say, “Psych. Just kidding. Takebacksies, let me go back to the federal government and get my relief.” So with regard to the rates, you know, rates are a little bit higher than they were a couple weeks ago. I would imagine that they’re going to come down. I think they’re going to have to just to be somewhat competitive with the government. But what the loan companies now are struggling with is not the fact that the fed has lower rates. It’s more about if I, Tim Ulbrich, if I let you refinance and now you’re making payments to me, the Baker Private Refi company, can I trust that you’re actually going to be employed to pay this back? And by the way, like I don’t have a huge cash reserve like the federal government that I can just rely on. So that’s why there was such a big flood of refis and these companies were like, whoa, like this is a problem and rates started to creep back up. And I think they’ll have to go back down just to incentivize, especially towards the end of that period, that September grace period, relief period, but yeah. So those are big, big differences we’re talking about. And sometimes those are used interchangeably, and they shouldn’t be. But a very common issue.

Drew: Awesome, guys. Should the student loan payments continue and just go 100% toward principal on the student loans during this time? Are federal Grad PLUS loans included?

Tim Baker: So the answer to the second question is yes. Grad PLUS loans are included. The answer to the first question is, typically no. So most of the time, if you are basically going through this strategy — if you selected your strategy appropriately, we’ll say, if you are in the federal system today, it’s really — the main reason is because you’re trying to seek some type of forgiveness option. So in that case, in that case, you should not pay a dollar more than you need to. The flag that you need to fly is you want to pay the least amount as humanly to maximize your forgiveness. So you’re going to take full advantage of that payment that would otherwise go there and basically direct that elsewhere.

Tim Ulbrich: And you get your forgiveness credit.

Tim Baker: Correct. Yeah, and get that month counted. Anytime that you can have basically a $0 payment, like a $0 interest payment, the math says basically money is a finite resource, use that money elsewhere. Now, this is kind of an emotional thing. Now, so the reason that I say most people that are in a federal payment is typically because they’re seeking forgiveness. You could be looking at me and saying, “Well, I’m in the federal program and I’m not seeking forgiveness.” So the reason I say that is because it makes sense from a math perspective to go outside — because of where rates have been for the last however many years — it makes sense to go out to a private company and get a better rate. Now, 10 years ago, a lot of these companies — like the student loan refi game was newer and when I was taught about student loans, you would never leave the federal system because the federal system, there’s a lot of these protections, forgive upon death and disability. But because of students loans are a $1.5 trillion issue, a lot of these companies have kind of risen to the same benefits that the federal government has. So now they can incentivize you to say, “Come over here and pay us the interest over the federal government.” So the question is should I pay the money back? I would say no unless your goal is to basically pay them off as quickly as possible. And if that’s true, then you probably should have refinanced years ago anyway. If that’s still true and you’re still in the federal system, I would say, yeah, you can pay it off. I would probably still direct that money elsewhere and then probably refinance because more than often, more often than not, you can get a better rate. Now, there are sometimes I come across loans that are like 2% and 3%. You know, if you are one of those people, don’t listen to me because I think you’re in the right spot. So if you are in a 2% or 3%, oftentimes, again, you’re like, alright, well I’d rather pay off my car loan that’s 5% or that credit card that I have that’s whatever percent. So those are some of the things you just have to weigh.

Tim Ulbrich: And if I could add to that, Tim, I think the only exception I think of here is if somebody knows themselves well enough that that money is going to be diverted elsewhere through kind of the typical lifestyle creep thing. If you know yourself well enough and you have that self-awareness, I think that might be the exception where you say, I’m going to keep making payments because momentum is really important. But the way I think about this is let’s say I’m making $1,500 a month payment let’s say on the standard default federal system. I think about that. If I didn’t have to make that payment, how would I best leverage $1,500 a month across my financial plan? And this is where we go back and we talk about this all the time on the podcast. So not just looking at one segment of your financial plan. So what does your emergency fund look like? What does the consumer debt look like? What investment opportunities exist? Are you not taking advantage of employer match in retirement, that type of situation? So you know, if you look at all those, more often than not I think what you’re really referring to is more often than not, if not almost always, you’re probably going to find an opportunity where that money could be leveraged elsewhere, at least for the short term when you have this 0% interest for six months.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I’ll give you an example. I was talking to a pharmacist in Washington. He’s married. He’s going for PSLF. I forget how much he’s paying per month. But he has a little ways to go with the emergency fund. He has a car — one of his car loans is 5-6%. So his question is, should I put money into the emergency fund? I’m like, yes, and probably focus on the car loan. And you know, if you think about it, these loan payments can be 8 — and especially if you’re married — it can be thousands and thousands of dollars. I mean, one, two, three months of that can go huge right into an emergency fund. Like I think about how much money my wife and I basically save into our Ally accounts for different purposes. You know, it’s about $1,500 a month after we’re putting money into 401ks and IRAs and things like that, 529 accounts for our kids. But you know, it’s going into our Mexico fund or it’s going into our home maintenance fund or whatever that looks like. But if I could basically double that for this amount of months, like that would be awesome. And then the other side of that is once you have your savings plan in place, that’s when you can really get dangerous with your investments. And sometimes we put the cart before the horse. So I work with a lot of pharmacists that are like credit card debt, student loan payments are kind of all over the place, and then they have like a Robinhood account. And I get — I know why we do that. It’s because we’re interested and we want to learn about investments, but those are — we’re three or four steps ahead where we probably shouldn’t be directing money into a taxable account. We should be focused on some of these steps 1-8 type of thing. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So Drew, I think we have time for probably one more question before we wrap up for the evening.

Drew: Awesome. So guys, for future borrowers of federal loans, do you think the interest rate will be higher after COVID-19 to make up for money lost?

Tim Ulbrich: Ooh, that’s a good question. You know, how will this get paid back and what impact will that have on future interest rates on federal loans? What do you think, Tim?

Tim Baker: I don’t think so. You know, I think rates for student loans have been pretty high with regard to like the federal side of things. That’s not uncommon for me to see. I mean, back — you know, if I’m working with people in their 40s and 50s, sometimes they have loans that are like 2% and I’m like, this is awesome. Because most of the time, I see 20-somethings, 30-somethings, that could be north of 7% for federal loans. And for pharmacists, those Grad PLUS loans, those add up. So and I think there is a little bit of a cry of like the government profiting on the backs of students, that type of thing. It is an unsecured debt, but it doesn’t ever go away. So like you can’t discharge student debt in bankruptcy, so it’s pretty secure in terms of like if you have student loans and you’re collecting social security, they’ll garnish that stuff. So that’s one of the problems with student loans is you can’t get away from them. So I don’t know if we see a big spike in rates after the fact. I mean, I could see the opposite, that they keep them low. But you know, who knows? You know, who knows what’s going to happen? We could see kind of a action-reaction type of thing with regard to that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s a really good question. You know, this reminds me to a talking point when we talk about PSLF. We need to remember that this is a — student loans are $1.5 trillion problem that are gaining a lot of momentum politically. And if you’ve watched any of the debates this season, this is an indicator as well as what we saw as the support in the CARES Act, I think we’re going to see more of that going through the election year. So you know, in theory, of course they could. But I don’t think it’s a very popular decision right now for a lot of the flack that they take in in terms of the rising student loan debt and the impact interest rates have had. So too soon to say, but I certainly don’t think it would be a popular decision.

Tim Baker: Yeah, but I mean, but to play devil’s advocate on the other side of the aisle is you know, with Trump, he’s basically proposing to get rid of it, which again, I saw some questions get in, come in like hey, is this really a viable thing? And I think the answer is still yes despite that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Because I still bet on the status quo versus a big change. And that’s either for like mass forgiveness or elimination. So it’s another issue where our country is very, very polarized over one issue. So but I think, again, to kind of reassure the PSLF-ers out there is that every — basically when this was enacted by President George W. Bush in 2007, every president and Congress since then has talked about getting rid of it or capping it. And it’s still here. And all of the documents and legislation, proposed legislation, to do this talks about future borrowers. So if you’re a student and you’re going to graduate in 2022, I don’t know. Maybe it will be there, maybe it won’t. But if you’re a year into PSLF and you’re in the program and you’re basically filled out the employment certification form, I think that you’re going to be fine. I would imagine if and when they ever do get rid of this, let’s pretend it’s January 1, 2025, then those people that are going to be into it — so if you’re in it December 31, 2024, your loans are going to be forgiven basically 10 years from then, essentially is what the thought is. So I think at least it’ll be grandfathered in. But the press on it is terrible. But I think it will get better.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I agree. And for those that want to learn more about this topic, we’ve covered it on the podcast a few different times. Episode 018, we talked about the benefits of PSLF. 078, we talked about is it a waste? And that was when the news had come out about 99% of borrowers or applicants of PSLF being denied. And then 114, most recently, we talked about the presidential candidates at the time predominantly was Elizabeth Warren and Bernie Sanders’ take on debt cancellation and forgiveness. So for those that had a question this evening that we did not get to, couple options I would throw out to you. One, if you aren’t already with us in the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join there. We’ve got a community that’s very active and responsive. You can throw your question out there. As well as we have a weekly segment we do on the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast called Ask a YFP CFP where we do just like we’re doing here, question from a member of our community teed up for Tim Baker, our financial planner, to answer that question. You can submit your question by going to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/askYFP. So thank you so much to everybody who attended. Really, really appreciate your engagement throughout the evening. I appreciate you all taking the time to come onto the webinar tonight. I want to thank Tim Baker again for his time as well, as well as APhA for making this session possible. Have a great rest of your evening.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]